Palm AT&T Treo 680 User Manual

User Guide

Your Palm

®

Treo

™

680 Smartphone

Intellectual Property Notices

© 2006–2007 Palm, Inc. All rights reserved. Blazer, HotSync, Palm,

Palm OS, Treo, VersaMail, and the Palm and Treo logos are among the trademarks or registered trademarks owned by or licensed to Palm,

Inc. This product contains ACCESS Co., Ltd.’s NetFront 3.0 Internet browser software. © 1996-2005 ACCESS Co., Ltd. and ACCESS

Systems America, Inc. NetFront is the trademark or registered trademark of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and in other countries except the United States of America. NetFront is a registered trademark of

NetFront Communications, Inc. in the United States of America and is used under a license. Documents To Go is a trademark or registered trademark of DataViz, Inc. All other brand and product names are or may be trademarks of, and are used to identify products or services of, their respective owners.

This product is protected by one or more of the following United

States patents:

7,007,239; 6,976,226; 6,975,304; 6,965,375; 6,961,567; 6,961,029;

6,957,397; 6,952,571; 6,950,988; 6,947,975; 6,947,017; 6,943,667;

6,940,490; 6,924,752; 6,907,233; 6,906,701; 6,906,741; 6,901,276;

6,850,780; 6,845,408; 6,842,628; 6,842,335; 6,831,662; 6,819,552;

6,804,699; 6,795,710; 6,788,285; 6,781,824; 6,781,575; 6,766,490;

6,745,047; 6,744,451; 6,738,852; 6,732,105; 6,724,720; 6,721,892;

6,712,638; 6,708,280; 6,697,639; 6,687,839; 6,685,328; 6,665,803;

6,618,044; 6,590,588; 6,539,476; 6,532,148; 6,523,124; 6,519,141;

6,516,202; 6,490,155; 6,480,146; 6,457,134; 6,456,247; 6,442,637;

6,441,824; 6,437,543; 6,429,625; 6,425,087; 6,389,572; 6,388,877;

6,381,650; 6,363,082; 6,344,848; 6,317,085; 6,241,537; 6,222,857;

6,185,423; 6,147,314; 6,115,248; 6,064,342; D421,251; D429,252;

D466,128; D478,091. Patent pending.

This product also is licensed under United States patent 6,058,304.

A portion of this software includes software modules developed by the Independent JPEG group.

This product includes technology owned by Microsoft and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft.

The TREO trademark is used by Palm in Sweden and Denmark with the express consent of McNeil AB and its affiliated companies. The products marketed and/or sold by Palm under the TREO trademark are in no way affiliated with McNeil or its business.

Swedish:

Varumärket Treo används av Palm i Sverige och Danmark med uttryckligt tillstånd från McNeil AB och dess dotterbolag. De produkter som marknadsförs och/eller säljs av Palm under varumärket

Treo ska på inget sätt alls kopplas samman med McNeil eller dess verksamhet.

Danish:

Treo-varemærket anvendes af Palm i Danmark og Svirge med udtrykkelig tilladelse fra McNeil AB og McNeils associerede selskaber. De produkter, der markedsføres og/eller sælges af Palm under Treo-varemærket, er på ingen måde tilknyttet McNeil eller

McNeils virksomhed.

Disclaimer and limitation of liability

Palm, Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any damage or loss resulting from the use of this guide. Palm, Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any loss or claims by third parties that may arise through the use of this software. Palm, Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any damage or loss caused by deletion of data as a result of malfunction, dead battery, or repairs.

Be sure to make backup copies of all important data on other media to protect against data loss.

Palm Take Back and Recycling Program

This symbol indicates that Palm products should be recycled and not be disposed of in unsorted municipal waste. Palm products should be sent to a facility that properly recycles electrical and electronic equipment.

For information on environmental programs visit: palm.com/environment.

As part of Palm’s corporate commitment to be a good steward of the environment, we strive to use environmentally friendly materials, reduce waste, and develop the highest standards in electronics recycling. Our recycling program keeps Palm handheld devices, smartphones, and mobile companions out of landfills through evaluation and disposition for reuse and recycling.

Palm customers may participate in the recycling program free of charge. Visit palm.com/recycle for additional details and information about how you can help reduce electronic waste.

v. 2.0

Contents

Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

What’s in the box? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

What do I need to get started? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Chapter 1: Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Smartphone overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Inserting the SIM card and battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Maximizing battery life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Making your first call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Setting up your computer for synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Synchronizing information—the basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Chapter 2: Moving around on your Palm

®

Treo

™

680 smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Moving around the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Opening applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Chapter 3: Your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Turning your smartphone on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Receiving calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Using voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

What can I do when I’m on a call? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

How many minutes have I used? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Entering names and phone numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Defining favorite buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

C O N T E N T S iii

Using a hands-free device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Customizing phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

What are all those icons? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Chapter 4: Your email and other messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Which email application should I use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

The VersaMail

® application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Chapter 5: Your connections to the web and wireless devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Connecting your computer to the Internet through your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Connections with Bluetooth

®

devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Chapter 6: Your photos, videos, and music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Pictures & Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Pocket Tunes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Chapter 7: Your personal information organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Chapter 8: Your memos and documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Documents To Go Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Voice Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Chapter 9: Your application and info management tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Using Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Viewing and using the alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 iv C O N T E N T S

Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Viewing application info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Sending information with Bluetooth

®

wireless technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Beaming information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Synchronizing information—advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Using expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Chapter 10: Your personal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

System sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Display and appearance settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Applications settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Locking your smartphone and info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Connecting to a VPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Chapter 11: Common questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Desktop software installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Resetting your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Hands-free devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

C O N T E N T S v

Making room on your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Third-party applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Where to learn more . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Important safety and legal information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 vi C O N T E N T S

Welcome

Congratulations on the purchase of your

Palm

®

Treo

™

680 smartphone! In one compact and indispensable device, you now have all of the following:

•

•

•

•

Contacts application that stores the names, phone numbers, and even pictures of friends, family, business contacts—everyone you stay in touch with

Email application for receiving and sending email (business and personal)

Palm OS ® by ACCESS personal info applications for storing your appointments, to-do lists, memos, and more

Expansion card slot that accepts cards

(MultiMediaCard/SD/SDIO; sold separately) for storing music files, videos, dictionaries, games, and lots of other applications

•

A VGA (640x480) digital camera for snapping photos and capturing short videos

•

•

•

•

Text and multimedia messaging

MP3 player

Applications for reading, creating, and editing Microsoft Office files and viewing PDF files

Desktop synchronization software for entering names, addresses, and more on your computer, and then transferring them to your smartphone with one press of a button

NOTE

Phone and text messaging services require a service contract with your wireless service provider. Web, email, and multimedia messaging services require a service contract and data services, such as

GPRS or EDGE, from your wireless service provider. Data speeds vary based on network availability and capacity.

W E L C O M E 7

What’s in the box?

You should have received all the following items in the smartphone box:

Hardware

•

•

Treo 680 smartphone

SIM card from your wireless service provider (not included with all models)

KEY TERM

SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card

The smartcard that you insert into your smartphone and that identifies you to the mobile network. It contains your mobile account information, such as your phone number and the services to which you subscribe. Phone book entries and SMS messages can also be stored on the SIM card.

Documentation and software

•

Read This First setup

booklet

•

•

Quick Reference Guide

Palm Software Installation CD, which includes the following:

•

Palm

®

Desktop software

•

Bonus software for your smartphone

•

•

Your Palm Treo 680 Smartphone User

Guide

(this guide)

Palm warranty

•

•

•

•

Rechargeable battery

AC charger with international adapter(s)

(if required in your region)

USB sync cable

Headset

8 W E L C O M E

What do I need to get started?

This guide helps you set up your smartphone and quickly learn to use it. To get started, you need all the items that came in the smartphone box (see What’s in the box? ), plus the following:

•

A SIM card. If you do not already have a

SIM card and your smartphone box did

not

contain a SIM card, you need to contact your wireless service provider to get one. Be sure to sign up for a mobile account with data services. To use your smartphone on your wireless service provider’s network, the SIM

•

•

• card must be inserted into your smartphone. Without a SIM card, you can only make emergency calls, such as

112 or 911.

You must be in a location where you are within coverage of your wireless service provider’s network.

An electrical outlet

The computer with which you want to synchronize your personal information

NOTE

To use email, web browsing, and multimedia messaging, your wireless service provider plan must include data services. Please contact your wireless service provider for details about your data service options.

W E L C O M E 9

10 W E L C O M E

Setting up

Congratulations on the purchase of your new Palm

®

Treo

™

680 smartphone. You’re about to discover the many things about your smartphone that will help you better manage your life and have fun, too.

As you become more familiar with your smartphone, you’ll want to personalize the settings and add applications to make it uniquely yours. But first, take these few easy steps to set up your smartphone and get it running.

Benefits

•

Know where your smartphone controls are located

•

Start using your smartphone right away

•

Establish a link between your smartphone and your computer

C H A P T E R

1

In this chapter

Smartphone overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Inserting the SIM card and battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Charging the battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Maximizing battery life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Making your first call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Setting up your computer for synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Synchronizing information—the basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

S E T T I N G U P

1

Smartphone overview

Front view

Indicator light (phone and charge indicator)

Earpiece

5-way navigator and

Center button

Power/End

Applications

Volume

Side button

Menu

Send

Phone

TIP

Protect your screen. Be careful to store your smartphone away from items that might scratch or crush the screen. Visit www.palm.com/treo680gsm to find carrying cases and other useful accessories.

Messaging

Calendar

DID YOU KNOW

?

When your smartphone screen is on, you can press and hold the

Side

button to open the Voice Memo application.

You can also change your button settings and select an application of your choice; see

Reassigning buttons for details.

S M A R T P H O N E O V E R V I E W 13

1

S E T T I N G U P

Back view

Speaker

Stylus

Self-portrait mirror

Camera lens

Battery door release

Expansion slot door

IMPORTANT

The smartphone speaker includes a large magnet, so be sure to keep your smartphone away from credit cards or other items that could be demagnetized.

Headset jack

Microphone

Multi-connector

14 S M A R T P H O N E O V E R V I E W

S E T T I N G U P

1

Top view

NOTE

Your SIM card may already be installed in your smartphone. Follow steps

1–3 to check. If a SIM card did not come with your smartphone, you may already have one; otherwise, your wireless service provider will give you one when you subscribe.

Infrared (IR) port Ringer switch

DID YOU KNOW

?

The Ringer switch silences all sounds at once. You don’t need to hunt for Off buttons all over the device.

1

Use one hand to press the

Battery door release

and use your other hand to slide the battery door downward to remove it from your smartphone.


Inserting the SIM card and battery

Your SIM card contains account information such as your phone number and voicemail access number. To use the phone, email, or web features, the SIM card must be inserted in your smartphone.

2

If the battery is installed, remove it.

(See Replacing the battery for details.)

3

Slide the SIM tray out of the slot inside the smartphone. If the SIM card is already installed, skip to step 6.

I N S E R T I N G T H E S I M C A R D A N D B A T T E R Y 15

1

S E T T I N G U P

4

Align the notch on the SIM card with the notch in the SIM tray. Insert the notched end of the SIM card into the

SIM tray, and then press the other end of the card until it falls into place.

Notch

6

Align the metal contacts on the battery with the contacts inside the battery compartment, insert the battery into the compartment at a 45-degree angle, and then press it into place.

Battery contacts

Smartphone contacts

5

Slide the SIM tray back into the slot inside the smartphone.

IMPORTANT

Use the battery that came with your smartphone. Do

not

use a battery from another smartphone model in your smartphone. Similarly, do

not

use the smartphone battery in another smartphone model. Using a battery that is designed for another smartphone model can damage

16 I N S E R T I N G T H E S I M C A R D A N D B A T T E R Y

S E T T I N G U P

1 your smartphone. For info on replacement batteries, see Replacing the battery.

7

Slide the battery door onto the back of the smartphone until it clicks into place.

8

Your smartphone screen wakes up and begins the setup process. When the language selection screen appears, select the language you want to use, and then follow the onscreen instructions to set up your smartphone.

TIP

The power-saving feature turns off the smartphone screen after a period of inactivity.

To wake up the screen, press and release

Power/End,

and then press

Center

on the

5-way to turn off

Keyguard

.

Charging the battery

TIP

If your smartphone does not turn on, you need to connect it to the AC charger. If it still does not turn on after being connected to the

AC charger for five minutes, then do a soft reset. See Performing a soft reset.

IMPORTANT

Always use the same language for your smartphone, your computer operating system, and your desktop software. Otherwise, you may lose information or have difficulty with synchronization. Support is not provided for mismatched language setups.

The battery comes with a sufficient charge to complete the setup process and activate your phone. After activation, we recommend charging your smartphone for three hours (or until the indicator light is solid green) to give it a full charge. See

Maximizing battery life for tips on maximizing the life of your smartphone battery.

TIP

To avoid draining the battery, charge your smartphone every day, especially if you use your phone often.

DID YOU KNOW

?

If your battery ever becomes fully drained, your info is still stored safely on your smartphone until you recharge the battery or connect your smartphone to a power source.

C H A R G I N G T H E B A T T E R Y 17

1

S E T T I N G U P

1

If necessary, connect the international adapter to the AC charger plug.

2

Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.

3

Connect the charger cable to the bottom of your smartphone. Make sure the arrow on the connector is facing up, toward the screen.

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can also trickle charge your smartphone without the AC charger by connecting it to your computer with the sync cable. However, it takes longer to charge the battery without the AC charger, and if your laptop isn’t plugged into a power source, it can drain the laptop’s battery. For the quickest charge time, use the AC charger.

TIP

When trickle charging your smartphone with the sync cable, the indicator light may not turn on. To make sure the battery is charging, check the onscreen battery indicator.

4

To confirm that your smartphone is charging, check the indicator light on your smartphone.

•

Solid red indicates that your smartphone is charging.

•

Solid green indicates that your smartphone is fully charged.

Indicator light

18 C H A R G I N G T H E B A T T E R Y

S E T T I N G U P

1

TIP

If the battery is fully drained, it may take a few moments for the indicator light to turn on when you begin charging.

TIP

If the indicator light does not turn on when you connect your smartphone to the AC charger, double-check the cable connection and the electrical outlet to which it is connected.

TIP

To see exactly how much power is left in your battery, tap the onscreen

battery

icon.

Battery icon

When your smartphone is on (see Turning your smartphone on and off), the onscreen battery icon displays the charging status:

A red lightning bolt indicates that the battery is connected to a wall outlet and is charging.

A green lightning bolt indicates that the battery is connected to a wall outlet and is fully charged.

A partial battery without a lightning bolt indicates that the battery is not connected to a wall outlet and it has some power.

An almost empty battery that is red at the bottom indicates that you need to charge the battery immediately.

Maximizing battery life

Battery life depends on how you use your smartphone. You can maximize the life of your battery by following a few easy guidelines:

IMPORTANT


not

use a battery from another smartphone in your smartphone. Similarly, do

not

use the smartphone battery in another

M A X I M I Z I N G B A T T E R Y L I F E 19

1

S E T T I N G U P smartphone. Using a battery that is designed for another smartphone can damage your smartphone. For info on replacement batteries, see Replacing the battery.

TIP

You can buy an extra battery as a spare for long airplane trips or periods of heavy use. To purchase batteries that are compatible with your smartphone, go to www.palm.com/ treo680gsm .

•

•

Charge your smartphone whenever you can. Charge it overnight. The battery has a much longer useful life when it is topped off frequently, rather than charging it after it is fully drained.

The wireless features (phone, email, messaging, and web) and media features (camera, media players, eBooks, and games) of your smartphone consume more power than its organizer features. Speakerphone usage also consumes more power than using the earpiece. If you use the wireless, speakerphone, and media features often, keep an eye on the

•

•

•

•

• battery icon and charge when necessary.

If you don’t plan to use the wireless features on your smartphone for a while, turn off your phone (see Turning your phone on and off) and let all calls be picked up by voicemail.

As with any mobile phone, if you are in an area with no wireless coverage, your smartphone searches for a signal, which consumes power. If you cannot move to an area of better coverage, temporarily turn off your phone. While your phone is off, you can continue to use the nonwireless features of your smartphone.

Turn down the screen brightness (see

Adjusting the brightness).

Decrease the settings in Power

Preferences and turn off Beam Receive

(see Optimizing power settings).

Turn off the Bluetooth ® feature if you’re not using it. See Connecting to a

Bluetooth hands-free device.

20 M A X I M I Z I N G B A T T E R Y L I F E

S E T T I N G U P

1

Making your first call

1

Press

Phone

.

2

If prompted, press

Center

to off

Keyguard

(see Locking your keyboard (Keyguard) for more info).

5

Press

Send

to dial the number.

6

If prompted, press

Center

to select

Yes

and turn on your phone.

Center

TIP

If

Check SIM Card

appears in the title bar, see Inserting the SIM card and battery.

TIP

If

No Service

appears in the title bar, you’re outside a wireless coverage area. If you believe you are in a wireless coverage area and this problem persists, contact your wireless service provider for assistance.

7

TIP

If you are inside a coverage area and cannot complete a call, contact your wireless service provider for assistance.

After you finish the call, press

End

to end the call.

Power/

3

Press

Left

to select the

Dial Pad

tab.

4

Tap the onscreen Dial Pad to enter the number you want to call.

Adjusting call volume

While a call is in progress, press the

Volume

button on the side of your smartphone to adjust the call volume.

•

To increase the volume, press the upper half of the

Volume

button.

M A K I N G Y O U R F I R S T C A L L 21

1

S E T T I N G U P

•

To decrease the volume, press the lower half of the

Volume

button.

TIP

If your phone number doesn’t appear in

Phone Info, make sure your SIM card is properly inserted in your smartphone. If your phone number still does not appear in Phone

Info, your wireless service provider may not support this feature. Look for your phone number on the plastic holder to which the SIM card was attached. If you still need assistance, please contact your wireless service provider.

Volume

Side button

What’s my phone number?

1

Make sure your phone is on (see

Turning your phone on and off).

2

Press

Phone

.

3

Press

Menu

.

4

Select

Options

, and then select

Phone

Info

.

Look here for your phone number

Setting up your computer for synchronization

Why set up a connection between your smartphone and your computer? So you can synchronize. Why synchronize? Here are two good reasons:

•

It’s easier to enter names, phone numbers, and addresses using the big keyboard on your computer than the keyboard on your smartphone. Whether you enter or change information on your computer (using Palm

®

Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook for

22 S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R F O R S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N

S E T T I N G U P

1

•

Windows, which is sold separately) or on your smartphone, you automatically update the info in both places when you synchronize. So there’s no need to enter the info twice.

You have a backup copy of all your info.

Should anything happen to your smartphone, your info still exists on your computer.

We strongly recommend that you synchronize your smartphone with your computer frequently to keep your information up-to-date (and backed up) in both locations.

Before you can synchronize, you need to install the desktop synchronization software and connect the sync cable to your computer.

System requirements

Your computer should meet the following minimum system profiles for Windows or

Mac computers:

•

Windows 2000 or XP (or later)

•

32MB of available memory (RAM)

•

170MB of free hard disk space

•

•

CD drive

•

Available USB port

Mac OS X version 10.2 or later

•

128MB of total memory (RAM)

•

190MB of free hard disk space

•

CD drive

•

Available USB port

Upgrading from another Palm OS

® by

ACCESS device

NOTE

If you are setting up your first Palm

OS

®

by ACCESS device, skip ahead to

Installing the desktop synchronization software.

You can transfer all compatible applications and information from your previous Palm

OS device—whether it’s a handheld or a smartphone— to your new smartphone, so long as the space taken up by all the info you want to transfer is 64MB or less. This includes your calendar events, contacts, memos, and tasks, as well as your application settings and any compatible third-party applications and files.

S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R F O R S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N 23

1

S E T T I N G U P

When you install the desktop software from the Palm Software Installation CD, some third-party applications may be quarantined because they are not compatible with the Palm OS software version 5.4.9 on your smartphone.

Quarantined files are not installed on your smartphone, nor are they deleted; these files are placed in a new folder on your computer: C:\Program Files\Palm\<device name>\PalmOS5 Incompatible Apps.

(Can’t find a Palm folder in Program Files?

Then look for a folder labeled palmOne or

Handspring instead. For more info, see I can’t find my user folder.)

IMPORTANT

Do not synchronize your smartphone with any

previous

versions of

Palm Desktop software.

TIP

We do not recommend using third-party utilities that back up your old device’s information onto an expansion card and then transfer the info to your smartphone. Such methods transfer all applications to your smartphone, including ones that are not designed to work with Palm OS version 5.4.9.

1

Calculate how much space your apps and info occupy on your

previous

Palm

OS device:

•

In Applications View, open the menus.

•

Select

Info

on the

App

menu.

•

At the bottom of the screen, select

Size

.

•

Look at the numbers on the

Free

Space

line and subtract the number on the left from the number on the right to calculate the space used. For example, on the device shown here,

22.4 – 17.5 = 4.9. This means that

4.9MB of space is occupied on this device.

2

If the space occupied on your previous device is 64MB or less, then go to step

3. If the space occupied is greater than

64MB, then do any of the following to


S E T T I N G U P

1 reduce the storage space you’re using before you go to the next step:

•

Delete any third-party applications that you no longer use.

•

Move large files, such as eBooks and images, to an expansion card.

•

Move third-party applications to an expansion card.

•

Purge old info in applications such as

Calendar (Date Book), Tasks (To Do), and email. Refer to the documentation that came with your previous device for instructions on these items.

3

Synchronize your

previous

device with your

previous

desktop software to back up your information one last time.

4

Install the desktop synchronization software from your new Palm Software

Installation CD (see Installing the desktop synchronization software).

5

During the installation process, sync your smartphone with your

new

desktop software as instructed. When prompted, do the following:

•

Connect your smartphone to your computer (see Connecting your smartphone to your computer).

•

Indicate whether you want to sync only the info in your PIM apps

(Calendar, Contacts, Memos, and

Tasks) or all info and apps (excluding apps known to be incompatible).

•

Select a device name for your smartphone; be sure to select the same name that you used for your old device. (This is the name that appears in the User list in Palm

®

Desktop software.)

6

MAC ONLY

If you have pictures on your previous device, copy them from your previous device to an expansion card or beam them to your smartphone.

7

If you plan to continue using your

previous

device, perform a hard reset on your

previous

device to remove its associated device name. (See the documentation that came with your

previous

device for instructions on performing a hard reset.) Each device you synchronize with your computer must have a unique name. The next time you synchronize your previous


1

S E T T I N G U P device with your computer, be sure to assign it a new name.

If any third-party applications are quarantined during the installation, do not manually install them. Contact the third-party developer for software updates and info about compatibility with your smartphone.

BEFORE YOU BEGIN

If you are installing on a computer at work, make sure your computer is configured to let you install new software. Contact your company’s

IT department for help.

TIP

If you have trouble upgrading or finding quarantined files, see Upgrading.

TIP

If you want to sync info with applications other than Palm Desktop or Microsoft

Outlook, you need to purchase additional third-party sync software. This sync software is sometimes called a

conduit

.

Installing the desktop synchronization software

IMPORTANT

Even if you already own a

Palm OS device and have installed a previous version of the desktop software, you

must

install the software from the

Palm Software Installation CD that came with your smartphone.

NOTE

Windows Vista

users: Before inserting the Palm installation CD, please visit www.palm.com/windowsvista, where you’ll find installation instructions and information about using your smartphone and desktop software with Windows Vista.

1

Close any applications that are currently running on your computer, including those that are minimized. Your computer needs to have all its resources available to install the software.

2

Insert the Palm Software Installation CD into the CD drive on your computer.


S E T T I N G U P

1

NOTE

Whether you select to synchronize with Microsoft Outlook or Palm Desktop software, Palm Desktop software is still installed on your computer. If you use

Outlook as your desktop email application, select Outlook as your desktop synchronization software. Remember that when you enter information on your computer, enter it in the software you selected in this step.

3

If you are installing on a Mac, double-click the

CD

icon on the desktop, and then double-click the

Palm

Software.pkg

icon.

4

When the installation wizard opens, follow the onscreen instructions. Please note these important points about the installation process:

•

When the language selection screen appears, select the same language you selected on your smartphone.

•

WINDOWS ONLY

You can choose which desktop software you want to use for synchronization:

Palm Desktop software

or

Microsoft

Outlook

.

0

•

The install process prompts you to connect your smartphone to your computer. Go to the next section.

Connecting your smartphone to your computer

After you install the desktop software (see

Installing the desktop synchronization software), you’re ready to connect your smartphone to your computer.


To set up your computer, you need the sync cable that came with your smartphone.

1

If necessary, connect the international adapter to the AC charger plug.


1

S E T T I N G U P

2

Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.

3

Plug the USB sync cable into an available USB port or a powered USB hub connected to your computer.

TIP

For best performance, plug your sync cable directly into a USB port on your computer. If your computer has USB ports on both the front and back, we suggest using the back port; the front port is often a low-power port. If you use a USB hub, make sure the hub has its own power supply.

4

With the sync button facing up, connect the sync cable to the bottom of your smartphone. Do not press the sync button until you are instructed to do so.

5

Connect the charger cable to the bottom of your smartphone.

You are now ready to synchronize; go to

Synchronizing information—the basics.

Sync cable


Sync button

S E T T I N G U P

1

Synchronizing information—the basics

info up-to-date (and backed up) in both locations.

The info from all the following applications is updated by default each time you sync your smartphone with your desktop software:

Synchronizing means that info you enter or change in one place (your smartphone or your computer) is automatically entered or changed in the other; so there’s no need to enter the info twice. We strongly recommend that you sync your smartphone with your computer or corporate server frequently to keep your

0

Computer type

Windows

Desktop software

Microsoft Outlook

How each application syncs depends on your computer type and the desktop software you are using, as follows:

Windows

Mac

Palm Desktop

Palm Desktop

What syncs and where

•

•

Calendar, Contacts, Memos, and

Tasks sync with Outlook

Pictures & Videos syncs with

Palm Desktop

All apps sync with Palm Desktop

All apps sync with Palm Desktop

S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — T H E B A S I C S 29

1

S E T T I N G U P

TIP

For more sync options, including which apps sync, see Synchronizing information— advanced.


To sync your info, you must install Palm Desktop software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your smartphone—even if you sync with Outlook or another third-party application. See Installing the desktop synchronization software for instructions.

Messages on both your computer and your smartphone indicate that synchronization is in progress.

3

Wait until you see the message on your smartphone that the HotSync operation is complete; then disconnect the sync cable. Do not disconnect the sync cable until you see this message.

TIP

Problems synchronizing? See

Synchronization for troubleshooting suggestions.

1

2

Connect your smartphone to your computer, as described in Connecting your smartphone to your computer.

Press the cable.

sync

button on the sync

If you’re finishing your initial setup, you now have the option to install bonus software from the Palm Software

Installation CD. If you choose to install some of the bonus software, you need to sync again to install the software on your smartphone. You can also install bonus software later; see Installing bonus software from the CD.

Sync button

TIP

For info on locating your pictures and videos on your computer, see Viewing pictures and videos on your computer.

30 S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — T H E B A S I C S

Moving around on your

Palm

®

Treo

™

680 smartphone

Have you ever been to a new city and felt a bit lost until you figured out that the numbered streets run north/south and the avenues run east/west? Learning to move around on your smartphone is similar. Most Palm OS

®

by ACCESS applications use the same set of controls. So once you learn how to use these controls on your Palm

®

Treo

™

680 smartphone, you’ll be driving all over town and you won’t even need a map.

C H A P T E R

2

Benefits

•

Find and open applications quickly

•

•

Access extra features with menus

Move around in applications with one hand, using the 5-way navigator

•

Access many more characters and symbols than are displayed on the keyboard

In this chapter

Moving around the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Opening applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M

®

T R E O

™

6 8 0 S M A R T P H O N E

2

Moving around the screen

To move around the smartphone screen, you can use the 5-way navigator for one-handed navigation, or you can tap items on the screen with the stylus. With use, you will find your own favorite way to scroll, highlight, and select menu items.

TIP

Some third-party applications may not work with the 5-way navigator, and you must use the stylus instead

DID YOU KNOW

?

In this guide, we use arrow icons to indicate directions on the 5-way.

These are different from any onscreen arrows that you tap with your stylus or select with the

5-way to display pick lists.

The 5-way includes the following buttons:

Center

Left

Up

Down

Right

M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N 33

2


®

T R E O

™


Highlighting and selecting items

On most screens, one item—a button, a list entry, or a check box—is highlighted by default. The highlight identifies which item is affected by your next action. Use

Left

,

Right

, , and

Down

on the

5-way to move the highlight from one item to another.

TIP

If the item you want doesn’t appear on the screen, try tapping the onscreen scroll arrows to view more info.

Learn to recognize the highlight. It can take two forms:

Border glow:

When an entire screen, an onscreen button (such as Done, New, or

OK), or a pick list is highlighted, a glow appears around its border. If an entire screen is highlighted, the glow appears at the top and bottom of the screen only.

Colored background:

When a phone number, text, an email address, a web link, or an item in a list is highlighted, the item is displayed as white text against a colored background. Examples of lists include the

Contacts list, the Messaging Inbox, and the

Tasks list.

After highlighting an item, you can select or activate it by pressing

Center

by tapping the item with the stylus.

TIP

When a border appears at the top and bottom of a list screen, press

Center

on the

5-way

to highlight the first item in the list.

TIP

After you open an application (see

Opening applications), experiment with using the 5-way to highlight various screen elements.

34 M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N


®

T R E O

™


2

•

•

Highlighting text

You can use the stylus to highlight text on the screen.

•

Tap and drag the stylus across the text you want to highlight.

To highlight a word, double-tap it.

To highlight a paragraph, triple-tap it.

Selecting menu items

Many applications have menus to give you access to additional features. These menus are usually hidden from view, but they appear when you press Menu . To get the most out of your smartphone, it’s a good idea to familiarize yourself with the additional features available through the various application menus.

1

Press

Menu

to display an application’s menus.

Accessing command buttons

In most applications, command buttons such as New, OK, and Details appear at the bottom of the screen. In many cases, you can jump directly to these buttons instead of scrolling to them.

•

•

•

From a list screen, such as the Memos list, press

Right

to jump to the first button.

Menu shortcut

From a screen where you create or edit entries, such as Contact Edit, press

Center

to jump to the first button.

From a dialog box, such as Edit

Categories, press

Up

or to scroll to the buttons.

2

Press

Right Left

to switch between menus.

3

Press

Up

menu item.

Down

to highlight a

4

Press

Center

to select the menu item, or press

Menu

to close the menu and cancel your selection.

M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N 35

2


®

T R E O

™


TIP

Most menu items have menu shortcuts listed in the menu. To use a menu shortcut, press

Menu

plus the shortcut letter. You don’t have to see the menu item to use the menu shortcut. For example, when you’re in

Calendar, you can press

Menu + N

to create a new event.

•

•

•

To exit the pick list without making a selection, press

Left Right

.

Stylus:

Use your stylus to tap the pick list.

Tap the item you want from the list.

To exit the pick list without making a selection, tap outside the list.

Selecting options in a pick list

A range of options is often presented in a type of menu called a pick list, which can be identified by a downward-pointing arrow. Pick lists are different from the application menus previously described.

The application menus give you access to additional features and pick lists let you select the contents for a particular field.

You can select items from a pick list with the 5-way or the stylus.

5-way:

Use the

5-way

to highlight the pick list, and then press

Center

to display the items in the list.

•

•

Press

Up Down

to highlight the item you want.

Press

Center

highlighted item. to select the

36 M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N


®

T R E O

™


2

Using the keyboard

Option

Shift/Find

Backlight

Backspace

Return

Menu

Space Alt

U S I N G T H E K E Y B O A R D 37

2


®

T R E O

™


NOTE

Your keyboard may have a different layout based on the country where you purchased your smartphone.

•

To turn Caps Lock on, press

Shift/

Find

twice. To turn it off, press

Shift/Find

once. When Caps Lock is on, an underlined up arrow appears in the lower-right corner of the screen.

TIP

When using the keyboard, most people find it easiest to hold the smartphone with two hands and use the tips of both thumbs to press the keys.

DID YOU KNOW

?

The smartphone includes a keyboard backlight that turns on and off when the screen turns on or off. The backlight also dims when an active call lasts longer than a specified period of time. See Optimizing power settings to adjust the automatic shut-off and dimming intervals.

Entering numbers, punctuation, and symbols

Numbers, punctuation, and symbols appear above the letters on the keys.

To enter these characters, do one of the following:

Symbol

Letter

Entering lowercase and uppercase letters

•

To enter lowercase letters, press the desired keys.

•

To enter an uppercase letter, press

Shift/Find

and then press a letter key. You don’t need to press and hold

Shift/Find

while entering a letter.

When Shift is active, an up arrow appears in the lower-right corner of the screen.

•

Press

Option

, and then press the key with the desired character shown above the letter. You don’t need to press and hold

Option

while pressing the second key. When Option is active, the symbol appears in the lower-right corner of the screen.

38 U S I N G T H E K E Y B O A R D


®

T R E O

™


2

•

To turn Option Lock on, press

twice. To turn it off, press

once. When Option Lock is on, the symbol

Option

Option

appears in the lower-right corner of the screen.

DID YOU KNOW

?

Some application views automatically default to Option Lock, such as the Dial Pad tab in the Phone application or the Calculator. In this case, you do not need to press

Option

to enter numbers.

1

Enter the character that corresponds to the symbol or accented character you want. See the table on the next page.

2

Press

Alt

.

3

Press

Up

, , ,

Left

to highlight the desired character.

4

Press

Center

to insert the character.

DID YOU KNOW

?

Alternate characters are grouped by their similarity to the base key. For example, the alternate characters available from the E key are é, è, ë, and ê.

Entering other symbols and accented characters

Symbols and accented characters that do not appear on the keyboard are available by using the Alt key.

U S I N G T H E K E Y B O A R D 39

2


®

T R E O

™


Symbols and accented characters

c

C

Enter… Then press

Alt to select…

a á à ä â ã å æ

A b or B e

Enter…

n

Á À Ä Â Ã Å Æ N

ß

ç ¢ ©

Ç ¢ ©

é è ë ê o

O p or P r or R

Then press


ñ

Enter… Then press


u ú ù ü û

Ñ

ó ò ö ô œ õ

Ó Ò Ö Ô Œ Õ y

¶ Y

®

U x or X

!

Ú Ù Ü Û x ¤

ý ÿ

Ý Ÿ

¡ i

E

I l or L

É È Ë Ê

í ì ï î

Í Ì Ï Î

£ s

S t or T

ß š

ß Š

™

:

?

$

¿

:-) :-( ;-)

£ ¥ ¢

Press Alt by itself, after a space or at the beginning or end of a line, to select these characters:

; _ • \ % = ° ÷ £ ¥ ¢ [ ] { } < > « » © ® ™ ~ ^ ø |

40 U S I N G T H E K E Y B O A R D


®

T R E O

™


2

Opening applications

When you open an application using a quick button or Applications View, you automatically close the app you were previously using.

Using the quick buttons

The front of the smartphone has three quick buttons—Phone, Calendar, and

Messaging—that open applications. The fourth button opens Applications View (see

Using Applications View).

TIP

You can customize the quick buttons yourself; see Reassigning buttons for details.

Phone

Calendar

Applications

Messaging

O P E N I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S 41

2


®

T R E O

™


Each quick button opens two applications:

•

To turn on your smartphone and open a button’s primary application, simply press the button.

Using Applications View

You can access all available applications through Applications View.

1

Press

Applications

.

Button Primary app

Phone

Calendar

Messaging

2

TIP

If prompted, press

Center

on the 5-way to turn off

Keyguard

(see Locking your keyboard

(Keyguard) for more info).

Use the

5-way

to highlight the application you want to use.

•

After you turn on your smartphone, open a button’s secondary application by pressing

Option

and then pressing the quick button.

Buttons

+

+

+

Secondary app

Web

Memos

Email

3

Press

Center

application.

to open the selected

DID YOU KNOW

?

Pressing

Option + Menu

dims your smartphone screen.

42 O P E N I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S


®

T R E O

™


2

In Applications View, you can also do any of the following:

•

Press

Applications

repeatedly to cycle through various categories of applications. See Applications settings for more info on categories.

•

Enter the first few letters of the application’s name to highlight it. For example, if you press

P

, it highlights

Phone; if you then press

R

, it highlights

Prefs. If you pause and then press

R

, it highlights the first application that starts with

R

.

O P E N I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S 43

2


®

T R E O

™


44 O P E N I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S

Your phone

The Phone application is your home base for making and receiving calls and for storing info about the people you need to stay in touch with.

You can creatively manage multiple calls, such as swapping between calls, sending text messages to ignored calls, and creating conference calls with up to five callers. Your Palm

®

Treo

™

680 smartphone helps you perform all these tasks with ease.

And you can do more than manage your phone calls, too. You can send text messages, open applications, go to your favorite web pages, see your upcoming appointments, and even find out how many unread email messages you have.

Benefits

•

Stay in touch—you choose how

•

Save time with shortcuts to your favorite info

•

Have fun: add wallpaper and ringtones

C H A P T E R

3

In this chapter

Turning your smartphone on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Receiving calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Using voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

What can I do when I’m on a call? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

How many minutes have I used?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Entering names and phone numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Defining favorite buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Using a hands-free device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Customizing phone settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

What are all those icons? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Y O U R P H O N E

3

Turning your smartphone on and off

organizer features of your smartphone; for example, when you’re on a plane and want to look at your calendar.

1

Press and release

Power/End

to wake up the screen.

NOTE

Throughout this guide we use the term

smartphone

to describe your device and its physical aspects. We use the term

phone

to describe the feature of your smartphone that lets you connect to your wireless service provider network to make and receive calls and transmit data.

TIP

You can also press any of the quick buttons or the

Applications

button to wake up your smartphone screen.

Power/End

Center

The phone and the screen of your smartphone can be turned off and on separately. This means that you can wake up the screen to use just the organizer and media apps of your smartphone (such as

Contacts, Calendar, Pocket Tunes, and

Pictures & Videos) without turning on the phone. Also, when the screen is turned off, the phone can be on and ready for you to receive and make calls.

2

Press

Center

to turn off

Keyguard

.

For more info about turning Keyguard on and off, see Locking your keyboard

(Keyguard).

3

Press and release

Power/End

to turn off the screen and lock the keyboard.

Waking up the screen and turning it off

Wake up the screen and leave the phone turned off when you want to use only the

T U R N I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E O N A N D O F F 47

3

Y O U R P H O N E

TIP

You can set how long the screen stays on.

Press

Applications

, select

Preferences

, select

Power

, and then adjust the

Auto-off after

setting.

TIP

If the Ringer switch is in the Sound On position, you hear a series of tones when you turn your phone on and off (see Silencing sounds).

Turning your phone on and off

When your phone is on, it is connected to your wireless service provider’s network

(provided you are in a coverage area) so that you can make and receive phone calls and use wireless services, such as email, messaging, and the web browser. During initial setup, your phone is automatically turned on, so you can use wireless services right away.

You know your phone is on and that you’re inside a coverage area when you go to the Main tab of the Phone application and you see the

signal-strength

icon at the top of the screen.

TIP

If you’re outside a coverage area, No

Service appears in the upper-left corner and the indicator light flashes red.

If you turn off your phone, you can still use the organizer features such as Calendar and Contacts, as well as the media features such as Pocket Tunes and Pictures

& Videos. You might hear this referred to as

flight mode

because you must turn your phone off when you’re on a plane.

3

Press and hold

Power/End

again to turn off your phone.

You know your phone is off when you go to the Main tab of the Phone application and you see

Phone Off

at the top of the screen.

1

Wake up the screen.

Opening the Phone application

2

Press and hold

Power/End

Press

Phone

to display the Main tab in turn on your phone. the Phone application.

48 T U R N I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E O N A N D O F F

Y O U R P H O N E

3

Status icons

3

Enter the phone number by tapping the onscreen Dial Pad with the stylus.

TIP

Press

Backspace

to delete numbers you’ve entered. To cancel the call altogether, press

Phone

to return to the Main tab in the

Phone application.

Tabs

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can choose which tab appears when you press the

Phone

button.

See Customizing the Main tab in the Phone application for details. If you change the default tab, you need to modify the steps in this chapter accordingly.

Making calls

There are several ways to make a call. Try them all to find out which way you like best.

Dialing using the onscreen Dial Pad

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Select the

Dial Pad

tab.

4

Press

Send

to make the call.

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can paste numbers directly into the Dial Pad. Copy a number from another application, press

Phone

and select the

Dial Pad

tab. Open the

Edit

menu and select

Paste

. Press

Send

to dial the number.

M A K I N G C A L L S 49

3

Y O U R P H O N E

Dialing using the keyboard

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Press the numbered keys to enter the phone number. (You don’t need to press

Option.)

3

Press

Send

to make the call.

TIP

After you enter a phone number, you can also press

Center

on the 5-way to select whether you want to make a phone call or send a text message to that number.

contact), but the fastest way to enter lots of contacts is to enter them in your desktop software and then synchronize to transfer them to your smartphone (see

Synchronizing information—the basics).

You can also import contacts from your

SIM card (see tip on Viewing your SIM

Phonebook).

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Select the

Contacts

tab.

3

Using the keyboard, just start entering one of the following for the contact you want to call:

•

First name (JOH for John)

•

Last name (SMI for Smith)

•

First initial and last name (JSM for

John Smith)

For example, entering SM would display

Smilla Anderson, John Smith, and

Sally Martin. Entering JSM finds only

John Smith.

Dialing by contact name

You need to have names and numbers in your contact list before you can make a call by contact name. You can add contacts directly into your smartphone (see Adding a

50 M A K I N G C A L L S

Y O U R P H O N E

3

Letters appear here as you press them

TIP

To restart your search, press

Backspace

to delete letters you’ve entered. Or press

Phone

to return to the Main tab in the Phone application.

Dialing with a speed-dial favorite button

Your smartphone comes with a few predefined speed-dial favorite buttons, but you can also create your own favorites. See

Creating a speed-dial favorite button.

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Select the

Favorites

tab.

3

Use the

5-way

to highlight the speed-dial favorite you want.

Look for the icon to distinguish a speed-dial favorite from other types of favorites.

4

Select the

number

you want to dial.

5

Press

Send

to make the call.

TIP

To see more info for a contact, highlight the

name

and press

Center

on the 5-way to view the address, company, and other details.

DID YOU KNOW

?

If you want to be able to search for a contact by entering a name from the Main tab in the Phone application, you can change a setting to do that. You can also choose a setting to dial by name or number from the Main tab (see Customizing phone settings).

TIP

To view more favorite buttons, repeatedly press

Down

on the 5-way.

M A K I N G C A L L S 51

3

Y O U R P H O N E

TIP

You can see all the contact numbers for the selected person or business. Highlight a

speed-dial favorite

button and press

Space

on the keyboard.

4

Press

Send

or to make the call.

TIP

If you can’t use the 5-way or stylus to highlight and dial a phone number on a web page or in a message, it means that your smartphone doesn’t recognize the number as a phone number. You can still use the menus to copy and paste the number into the Dial

Pad.

Dialing from a web page or message

Your smartphone recognizes most phone numbers that appear on web pages or in text, email, or multimedia messages.

1

Select the phone number on the web page or in the message.

2

Press

Center

to open the Dial

Number dialog box.

3

Select

Dial

to make the call.

Redialing a recently called number

To dial the last number:

Select the

Main

tab, and then press and hold

Send

to dial the last number you called.

To select from your most recently dialed numbers:

Select the

Main

tab, press

Send

to open the Redial list, highlight the number you want to call, and then press

Send

again to make the call.

52 M A K I N G C A L L S

Y O U R P H O N E

3

Receiving calls

To select from your call history list:

Select the

Call Log

tab, highlight the number you want to call, and then press

Send

to dial the number.

To receive calls, your phone must be on.

This is different from having only the screen turned on (see Turning your phone on and off). When your phone is off, your calls go to voicemail.

DID YOU KNOW

?

If music is playing and a call arrives, the music pauses automatically and resumes when you hang up or ignore the call.

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can send a text message from Contacts or your Call Log by highlighting a number, pressing

Center

on the 5-way, and then selecting

Message

.

TIP

See a photo of the person calling you!

Learn how to assign a caller ID photo in

Assigning a caller ID photo.

To answer a call, do one of the following:

R E C E I V I N G C A L L S 53

3

Y O U R P H O N E

•

•

•

Press

Send

Select

Answer

.

.

Press the

headset

button (if the headset is attached).

TIP

The headset button may work differently on headsets other than the one provided with your smartphone.

•

Slide the

Ringer switch

to the

Sound

Off

position. This immediately silences all system sounds, including the ringer.

DID YOU KNOW

?

When you silence the ringer while it is ringing, you can either answer the call or let it ring through to voicemail.

NOTE

Pressing

Phone

silences the ringer, but it does not answer the call.

Using voicemail

To ignore a call, do one of the following:

Send the call to voicemail:

Press

Power/

End

or select

Ignore

.

Send the caller a text message:

Select

Ignore with Text

. This option sends the call to voicemail and opens a text message addressed to the caller.

NOTE

Sending text messages to land line phones may not be supported.

Your wireless service may include voicemail. Keep in mind that airtime and other charges may apply when using voicemail from your phone.

Setting up voicemail

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Press and hold

1

to dial your wireless service provider’s automated voicemail system.

To silence the phone while it is ringing, do one of the following:

•

Press any key on your smartphone except Send, Power/End, or the 5-way.

TIP

You can also access your wireless service provider’s voicemail system by selecting the

Favorites

tab and then selecting the

Voicemail

favorite.

54 U S I N G V O I C E M A I L

Y O U R P H O N E

3

3

Follow the voice prompts to set up your voicemail.

TIP

If you can’t connect to your wireless service provider’s voicemail system, contact your wireless service provider for assistance.

When you have messages that you have not listened to, a Voicemail icon also appears in the title bar of the Phone application. You can also select this icon to listen to your voicemail.

Voicemail notification

When you have a new voicemail message, you are notified with an Alert dialog box.

Listening to voicemail messages

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Press and hold

1

to dial the voicemail system.

TIP

You can also select the

Voicemail

favorite button to dial the voicemail system.

3

Enter your voicemail password using the keyboard.

TIP

Remember, you don’t need to press

Option to enter numbers, *, or # during a call.

•

To dismiss the Alert dialog box, select

OK

.

TIP

To permanently dismiss the reminder, tap the blinking bell with your stylus to open the

Alert dialog box and dismiss the alert.

NOTE

If you defined

Extra Digits

for the

Voicemail favorite button (see Editing a favorite button for details), you can select this button to enter your password.

•

To play the message, select

Listen

.

U S I N G V O I C E M A I L 55

3

Y O U R P H O N E

What can I do when

I’m on a call?

When you make or receive a call, Active

Call View appears.

TIP

If the screen dims during a call, press any key except Send or Power/End to restore the screen brightness.

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can set how long the screen stays at full brightness during phone calls. See Optimizing power settings for details.

Button label

Caller’s name and number

Call duration

Call status

0

Use the

5-way

or stylus to select the onscreen buttons. Here’s what the buttons do:

Turns on the speakerphone, which means that you and everybody around you can hear the call. (Of course, the caller can hear you as well.) The advantage is that you can check your calendar, look up contact info, take notes, and use other features during a call. This button is not available when you use a headset.

Turns off the speakerphone when it is on.

Replaces the Speakerphone button when you use a Bluetooth ® hands-free device. Select this button to stop using the hands-free device and switch to holding your smartphone to your ear.

Puts a call on hold, and the call status changes to On Hold. To take the call off hold, select this button again.

56 W H A T C A N I D O W H E N I ’ M O N A C A L L ?

Y O U R P H O N E

3

Lets you make another call while the first call is on hold; see Making a second call for details. For info on handling a second incoming call, see Receiving a second call (call waiting).

Opens the Dial Pad so you can use it to dial additional numbers, such as an extension or a response to a voice prompt.

Dials any extra digits (such as a password or an extension) that you assigned to a speed-dial favorite button. See Defining favorite buttons for information on defining extra digits. This button disappears after you select it to dial the numbers.

Mutes the microphone so that you and the noise around you can’t be heard on the other end. The call status changes to Muted. When you want to speak, be sure to select the Mute button again.

DID YOU KNOW

?

Do you accidentally press onscreen buttons when you’re on a call? You can disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature during phone calls, see Locking your screen.

Remember: To manage an active call when the touchscreen is disabled, use the hardware buttons on your smartphone.

•

•

Ending a call

Do one of the following:

Press

Power/End

.

Press the button on the headset (if the headset is attached).

Switching applications during a call

You can use your organizer apps and other applications while you’re talking on the phone; so go ahead and check your calendar, or go to Memos and enter the driving directions your caller is giving you.

You can even send text messages while you’re on a call.

NOTE

What you can’t do, however, is make a data connection while on a call.

This means that you can’t browse the web

W H A T C A N I D O W H E N I ’ M O N A C A L L ?

57

3

Y O U R P H O N E or send or receive email or multimedia messages.

1

(Optional) If you want to continue talking while viewing another application, select

Speakerphone

or connect a headset (see Using a hands-free device).

2

Press

Applications

.

3

Select the icon for the application you

4

want to open.

When you’re ready to leave the app, open another app or press

Phone

to return to Active Call View.

TIP

You can turn the Add New Number prompt on and off. In Contacts, open the

Options

menu, and select

Preferences

. To turn this option on, check the

Ask to add unknown phone numbers after calls

box. To turn this option off, uncheck this box.

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can press

Phone

to toggle between Active Call View and the Main tab in the Phone app, so you can access other tabs, such as Contacts and Favorites, during a call.

Saving phone numbers

When you hang up on a call from a number that is not in your Contacts list, you are prompted to add the number to your

Contacts list.

•

•

•

To create a new contact entry for this number, select

Create a New Contact

, and enter the contact’s info.

To add this number to an existing contact entry, select

Add to a Contact

, and then select the contact. This pastes the number into the first available phone number field for that contact.

To decline adding this number, select

Cancel

.


Y O U R P H O N E

3

•

To disable the Add New Number prompt, check the

Don’t ask me this again

box, and then select

Cancel

.

If you don’t add a number right away, follow these steps to add it later.

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Select the

Call Log

tab.

3

Highlight the number you want to save.

4

Press

Menu

.

5

Select

Add Contact

.

6

Select

New

to create a new contact, or select

Add

to add this number to an existing contact.

7

Enter the information for the entry, and then select

Done

.

2

Put the first call on hold by pressing

Send

or selecting

Hold

.

3

Select

Add Call

.

4

Dial the second number.

NOTE

To dial the second number, you can use any of the methods described in

Making calls.

5

When the

Dial another call

prompt appears, select

Yes

.

6

Select

Swap

to switch between the two calls.

Making a second call

You can make a second call while your first call is still active.You can then switch between two independent conversations, or you can join several calls in a conference. See Making a conference call.

1

Dial the first number and wait until the person answers.

7

To end the active call, press

Power/End

.

DID YOU KNOW

?

When you hang up one call, you can continue your conversation with the remaining call.


59

3

Y O U R P H O N E

Receiving a second call (call waiting)

When you are on a call, you can receive a second call and have separate conversations with each caller. When the second call comes in, you hear a call waiting tone and the Call Waiting dialog box appears. You can do any of the following to handle the second call:

•

•

•

To place the current call on hold and answer the new call, press

Send

or select

Answer

.

To send the new call to voicemail, select

Ignore

.

To send the new call to voicemail and send the caller a text message, select

Ignore with Text

.

NOTE


Making a conference call

You can join a total of five other calls in a conference call, provided that your network and service plan include 6-way conferencing. Please contact your wireless service provider for more information.

Additional charges may apply and minutes in your mobile account may be deducted for each call included in the conference call.

1

While the first call is active, make a second call.

2

Select

Conference

. This joins you and the two calls in a conference call.

•

•

To hang up the current call and answer the new call, press

Power/End

and then press

Send

.

To switch between the original call and the second call you answered, select

Swap

or press

Send

.

3

To add more calls to the conference, select

Hold

, dial another number, and then select

Conference

to add the new call.


Y O U R P H O N E

3

4

To end all the calls at once, make sure the conference is the active call, and then press

Power/End

.

TIP

If you want to hold a separate “sidebar” conversation with one of the people on a conference call, you can extract that call from the conference. Select

Extract Call

(the onscreen button on the far right), and when the list of callers appears, select the call you want to extract. The conference call remains on hold while you speak privately on the extracted call.

Forwarding all calls

You can forward all your calls to another telephone number. You can also selectively forward certain calls (see Forwarding calls under certain conditions). Please check with your wireless service provider about availability and pricing of forwarded calls, as additional charges may apply.

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Options

, and then select

Call

Preferences

.

4

Select the

Forward all calls

pick list.

•

If the forwarding number appears in the pick list, select the number.

•

If the forwarding number does not appear in the pick list, select

Edit

Numbers

, and then select

New

.

Enter a forwarding number, including the area code and country code if they are different from your mobile phone number. Select

OK

. Select the number you just entered, and then select

OK

.

5

Select the number you just entered, select

OK

, and then select

OK

again.


61

3

Y O U R P H O N E

TIP

After you set the number you want to forward all your calls to, the call forwarding icon appears in the title bar (see What are all those icons?). We also recommend that you call your smartphone to confirm that your call forwarding settings work properly.

TIP

To turn off forwarding for all calls, select

Off

from the


pick list.

Forwarding calls under certain conditions

You can forward calls to another number when the line is busy, a call is unanswered, your smartphone is off, or you are outside a coverage area.

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Options

, and then select

Call

Preferences

.

4

Select the


pick list and select

Off

.

5

Select any of the following pick lists:

When busy:

Forwards calls if the phone is busy.

Not answered:

Forwards calls if you do not answer.

Off/No service:

Forwards calls when your smartphone is not connected to a mobile network.

6

If the forwarding number appears in the pick list, select the number. If the forwarding number does not appear in the pick list, select

Edit Numbers

and then select

New

. Enter a forwarding number, and select

OK

. Select the number you just entered.

7

Select

OK

, and then select

OK

again.

How many minutes have I used?

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Select the

Call Log

tab.

3

Press

Menu

.

4

Select

Totals

from the

Record

menu.

62 H O W M A N Y M I N U T E S H A V E I U S E D ?

Y O U R P H O N E

3 that contact, so you know when they call you.

5

(Optional) To reset the counters to zero, select

Reset Counters

.

6

Select

Done

.

Adding a contact

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Select the

Contacts

tab.

3

Press

Menu

.

4

Select

New Contact

from the

Record

menu.

5

Use the

5-way

to move between fields as you enter info.

Entering names and phone numbers

Contacts is where you enter information about the people you want to stay in contact with. You can get to this info from the Phone application, to dial phone numbers and create favorites, and from the

Messaging and email applications, to send messages. When you create a contact, you can also assign a photo and ringtone ID to

DID YOU KNOW

?

If you add a symbol at the beginning of a contact’s last name, such as

#Smith, the contact appears at the top of your contact list.

E N T E R I N G N A M E S A N D P H O N E N U M B E R S 63

3

Y O U R P H O N E

6

Do any of the following:

Add a caller ID photo:

Select the

Picture box. (See Assigning a caller ID photo for more info.)

Add a caller ID ringtone

: Select the

Ringtone

pick list. (See Assigning a caller ID ringtone for more info.)

Place the entry in a category or mark it private:

Select

Details

. (See Working with private entries for more info.)

Add a note to an entry:

Select

Note

.

Display additional fields for this contact:

Select

Plus

.

7

After you enter all the information, select

Done

.

3

Begin entering one of the following for the contact you want to view or edit:

•

First name (JOH for John)

•

Last name (SMI for Smith)

•

First initial and last name (JSM for

John Smith)

4

Select the

name

of the entry you want to open.

TIP

To edit the entries on your SIM card you must either import them into Contacts or press

Applications

, select

SIM Book

, and edit them in the phone book on your SIM card.

5

Select

Edit

.

6

Make changes to the entry as necessary, and then select

Done

.

TIP

Import contacts from your SIM card quickly and easily. In the Contacts list, press

Menu

and select

Import from SIM

from the

Record menu.

Viewing or changing contact information

1

2

Press

Phone

Select the

.

Contacts

tab.

Assigning a caller ID photo

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Select the

Contacts

tab.

3

Open the contact you want to add the photo to (see Viewing or changing contact information).

4

Select

Edit

.

5

Select the

Picture

box and do one of the following:

64 E N T E R I N G N A M E S A N D P H O N E N U M B E R S

Y O U R P H O N E

3

6

•

Select

Camera

to take a photo, and then press

Center

to add the photo to this contact entry when you save the photo.

•

Select

Photos

and select an existing photo that you want to assign to this contact.

Select

Done

.

Assigning a caller ID ringtone

Caller ID ringtones can let you know who is calling before you even look at your smartphone. This is a great way to identify calls from important people in your life and to screen calls that you’d prefer not to answer.

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Select the

Contacts

tab.

3

To open the contact entry for editing, select the name of the contact to whom you want to give a caller ID ringtone

(see Viewing or changing contact information).

4

Select

Edit

.

5

Select the

Ringtone

pick list and select a tone for this contact entry.

DID YOU KNOW

?

If you assign pictures to your contacts in Microsoft Outlook or

Palm

®

Desktop software and you install the desktop software from the Palm Software

Installation CD, the pictures are automatically added to your contact entries on your smartphone when you sync. If you use third-party synchronization software, picture sync may not be supported. Check with the software developer for information.

E N T E R I N G N A M E S A N D P H O N E N U M B E R S 65

3

Y O U R P H O N E

6

Select

Done

.

TIP

You can assign a ringtone to an entire category of contacts. For example, use a special ringtone for categories such as Family,

Work, or Golf Buddies. In the Contacts list, select the

category

pick list in the upper-left corner and select

Edit Categories

. Select the category, and then select

Edit

. Select the ringtone on the Edit Category screen.

Ask to add unknown phone numbers after calls:

Sets whether you are prompted to add phone numbers that are not in your Contacts list after a call.

You can add unknown numbers to an existing contact or create a new contact entry.

List By:

Sets whether the Contacts list is sorted by last name or company name.

Customizing Contacts

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Select the

Contacts

tab.

3

Press

Menu

.

4

Select

Options

, and then select

Preferences

.

5

Set any of the following options:

Remember Last Category:

Sets whether Contacts opens to the last category you selected.

Show SIM Phonebook:

Sets whether

SIM Phonebook appears as an option in the category pick list. When you check this box, you can view entries in the phone book on your SIM card.

Deleting a contact

1

Open the contact you want to delete.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Delete Contact

from the

Record

menu, and then select

OK

.

Creating a business card for beaming

1

Create a new contact and enter your own business card info.

2

Open the contact entry containing your business card info.

3

Press

Menu

.

4

Select

Select Business Card

from the

Record

menu.

66 E N T E R I N G N A M E S A N D P H O N E N U M B E R S

Y O U R P H O N E

3

TIP

After you create your business card, you can beam it to another device with an IR port—provided the device supports beaming with Palm

®

OS by ACCESS devices. Go to

Contacts

or the

Main

tab in the Phone application, open the

Record


Beam Business Card

.

Viewing your SIM Phonebook

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Select the

Contacts

tab.

3

Press

Menu

.

4

Select

Options

, and then select

Preferences

.

5

Make sure the

Show SIM Phonebook

box is checked.

6

Select

OK

.

7

In the Contacts list, select the

category

pick list at the top of the screen and select

SIM Phonebook

.

TIP

If you imported contacts from your SIM card to Contacts, you may want to uncheck the

Show SIM Phonebook

box to avoid seeing duplicate entries.

TIP

Need to copy a contact to your phone book on your SIM card? In

Contacts

, select the contact you want to copy, open the

Record


Export to

SIM

.

Defining favorite buttons

•

•

•

•

Your smartphone allows you to set an unlimited number of favorite buttons for quick access to the following common tasks:

•

Dialing a phone number (speed-dial)

Opening an application

Accessing a web page

Addressing a message (text, MMS, or email)

Accessing voicemail (preset on your smartphone)

D E F I N I N G F A V O R I T E B U T T O N S 67

3

Y O U R P H O N E

TIP

Your wireless service provider may preset favorite buttons on your smartphone that are customized for their services.

4

Select

New Favorite

on the

Record

menu.

5

Enter a label for the favorite:

•

If the entry is for an existing contact, select

Lookup

. Start entering the last name of the contact, and select the contact when it appears in the lookup list.

•

If the entry is for a new contact, enter the label, press

Down

, and enter the number.

DID YOU KNOW

?

If you’re upgrading from a smartphone 600/650, most of your favorites should transfer from your old smartphone along with your other info. However, you may need to rearrange the order in which your favorites appear by opening the

Record

menu and then selecting

Organize Favorites

. For more info about upgrading, see Upgrading from another Palm OS

® by ACCESS device.

6

(Optional) Enter a

Quick Key

.

Creating a speed-dial favorite button

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Select the

Favorites

tab.

3

Press

Menu

.

68 D E F I N I N G F A V O R I T E B U T T O N S

Y O U R P H O N E

3

KEY TERM

Quick Key

A letter that you can press and hold to activate a favorite from any tab in the Phone app. For example, create a speed-dial button for your mother’s number and enter the letter

M

for “Mom” as the

Quick Key. Then when you want to call her, go to the Phone app and press and hold

M

. Your smartphone dials the number.

7

(Optional) Select

More

, and then select advanced options:

Extra Digits:

Defines additional digits to dial, such as a password or extension.

To enter a one-second pause, insert a comma ( , ) between digits. To add a longer pause, either enter more commas, or enter a

p

to add a 3-second pause.

Dial Extra Digits Automatically:

Dials predefined extra digits immediately after dialing the phone number, when checked. If you don’t check this box, to dial these numbers you must select the

Extra Digits

button that appears in

Active Call View (see What can I do when I’m on a call?).

8

Select

OK

.

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can assign a special ringtone for a contact. See Assigning a caller

ID ringtone for details.

Creating other types of favorite buttons

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Select the

Favorites

tab.

3

Press

Menu

.

4

Select

New Favorite

on the

Record

menu.

5

Select the

Type


Application

,

Message

,

Email

, or

Web

Link

.

6

Enter a label for the favorite and enter any other necessary information on the screen.

7

(Optional) Enter a

Quick Key

.

8

Select

OK

.

TIP

When creating a Message or Email favorite, you can enter multiple addresses; simply separate each address with a comma.

This is an easy way to send messages to a group of people.

D E F I N I N G F A V O R I T E B U T T O N S 69

3

Y O U R P H O N E

Editing a favorite button

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Select the

Favorites

tab.

3

Highlight the favorite button you want to edit.

4

Press

Menu

.

5

Select

Edit Favorite

on the

Record

menu.

6

After you make your changes, select

OK

.

3

Highlight the favorite button you want to delete.

4

Press

Menu

.

5

Select

Edit Favorite

on the

Record

menu.

6

Select

Delete

.

7

Select

OK

.

Using a hands-free device

TIP

To arrange your favorites, open the

Record

menu and select

Organize Favorites

.

Highlight the favorite you want to move, and then press and hold

Option

+

Up

or

Down

to move the button to another position. Select

Done

.

Deleting a favorite button

TIP

Some favorites, such as voicemail, cannot be deleted. If a favorite can’t be deleted, the

Delete button does not appear on the screen.

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Select the

Favorites

tab.

If you need to use your phone while driving and this is safe and permitted in your area, use a phone headset (wired headset included) or car kit (sold separately) for hands-free operation. Using a hands-free device also makes it easy to check your calendar, look up contact info, take notes, and use other features during a call.

In addition to the headset included with your smartphone, your smartphone is compatible with the following types of hands-free devices that are sold separately:

70 U S I N G A H A N D S - F R E E D E V I C E

Y O U R P H O N E

3

•

•

Wired headsets and car kits with a

2.5mm connector (3-pin or 4-pin)

Wireless headsets and car kits enabled with Bluetooth

®

1.1 or 1.2 wireless technology

TIP

The headset designed for smartphone

180/270/300 is not compatible with your smartphone.

Check the specifications for your hands-free device to confirm compatibility.

When in doubt, ask the manufacturer if the product is compatible with your smartphone. To view a list of compatible

Bluetooth hands-free devices, go to www.palm.com/treo680gsm-support.

NOTE

You cannot use a hands-free device with Bluetooth wireless technology to listen to music files.

•

•

•

Using a wired headset

When using the headset that is included with your smartphone, you can press the headset button to perform any of the following tasks:

•

•

Answer an incoming call

Answer a call-waiting call

Resume a call that you put on hold (not available when multiple calls are in progress)

Swap between two calls (one on hold and one active)

Hang up the active call

TIP

On other headsets, the headset button may work differently than the button on the headset included with your smartphone.

TIP

To listen to music in stereo, you can purchase the Palm 2-in-1 Stereo Headset. If you want to use a stereo headset with a

3.5mm connector, then you need to purchase a stereo adapter. Visit www.palm.com/ treo680gsm for more info on audio accessories.

U S I N G A H A N D S - F R E E D E V I C E 71

3

Y O U R P H O N E

Microphone

Headset button range is up to 30 feet in optimum environmental conditions. Performance and range may be reduced by physical obstacles, radio interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors.

TIP

If you hear a headset buzz or experience poor microphone performance, your headset may be incompatible with your smartphone.

Speaker

Connecting to a Bluetooth hands-free device

KEY TERM

Partnership

Two devices—for example, your smartphone and a hands-free device—that can connect because each device finds the same passkey on the other device. Once you form a partnership with a device, you don’t need to enter a passkey to connect with that device again. Partnership is also known as paired relationship, pairing, trusted device, and trusted pair.


Prepare your hands-free device to accept a Bluetooth connection. See the documentation that came with your hands-free device for instructions.

1

Press

Applications

and select

Bluetooth

or tap the

Bluetooth

icon in the title bar.

2

Select

Bluetooth On

.

NOTE

The Bluetooth icon changes from gray to blue to let you know that Bluetooth technology is turned on.

Once you set up a partnership with a

Bluetooth hands-free device, you can communicate with that device whenever it is turned on and within range. Bluetooth


Y O U R P H O N E

3

3

(Optional) Enter a device name that identifies your smartphone when it is discovered by other Bluetooth devices.

NOTE

Use the same device name for all your Bluetooth connections. If you change the device name, you need to recreate any partnerships you have already created.

4

5

Select

Select

Setup Devices

.

Hands-free Setup

.

6

Follow the onscreen instructions to create a partnership with the specific hands-free device. When prompted, enter a passkey.

IMPORTANT

Some hands-free devices have a predefined passkey. If your device has a predefined passkey, you can find it in the documentation for that device. Other devices provide a screen where you enter a passkey that you make up. In either case, you must use the same passkey on both your smartphone and your hands-free device. We recommend that where possible, you make up a passkey of 16 alphanumeric characters (letters and numerals only) to improve the security of your smartphone. The longer the passkey, the more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered.


3

Y O U R P H O N E

7

After you finish setting up the device, select

Done

to return to Trusted

Devices View.

NOTE

For some car kits, you need to initiate a Bluetooth connection from your smartphone to complete the partnership process. To do this, highlight the car kit in

Trusted Devices View, press

Menu

, and then select

Connect

.

8

(Optional) Enable advanced hands-free features by pressing the

multifunction

button (MFB) on the hands-free device.

You can tell the connection is successful when you see a light blue headset icon in the title bar of the Phone application. You can now use your smartphone with the

Bluetooth hands-free device.

answer the call on your smartphone, the call goes to the hands-free device. If you prefer to route calls to the earpiece on your smartphone, you can change the settings on your smartphone to do this; see

Customizing advanced settings for your hands-free device for details.

TIP

If you’re using a Bluetooth hands-free device and you want to return to the earpiece or a wired headset during a call, select

Cancel

Bluetooth

in Active Call View. To return the call to the hands-free device, open the

Options

menu and select

Connect

Bluetooth

.

The features of your hands-free device vary by model. Check the documentation for your hands-free device for details about these features. Your smartphone can support the following actions, provided that your hands-free device also supports them:

Using a Bluetooth hands-free device

After you create a partnership with your

Bluetooth hands-free device and you turn it on within range (up to 30 feet), the smartphone automatically routes all calls to the hands-free device instead of to the earpiece on your smartphone. When a call comes in, your smartphone rings and the hands-free device beeps. Even if you

•

•

•

•

Answer an incoming call

Hang up a call and answer a call-waiting call

Place a call on hold and answer a call-waiting call

Hang up a single call


Y O U R P H O N E

3

•

•

•

Transfer an outgoing call from the earpiece on your smartphone to the hands-free device

Ignore an incoming call

Redial the last number you called from the hands-free device

DID YOU KNOW

?

If you have more than one

Bluetooth hands-free device, the last one you connected to becomes the active device. To switch between devices, turn off the active device before you try to connect to the other device.

Customizing advanced settings for your hands-free device

You can set whether your hands-free device automatically answers calls, provided the device supports this feature.

1

Press

Applications

and select

Prefs

.

2

Select

Hands-free

.

3


To send all calls to your hands-free device:

Check the

Always route calls to handsfree

box. Select the

Auto answer

pick list and select whether you want your hands-free device to automatically answer incoming calls and how quickly it answers.

To choose between the earpiece on your smartphone and your hands-free device on a call-by-call basis:

Uncheck the

Always route calls to handsfree

box. When the phone rings, you can answer the call with your hands-free device by pressing the multifunction button on your hands-free device, or you can answer the call with the earpiece on your smartphone by using the controls on your smartphone

(see Receiving calls).

4

Select

Done

.


3

Y O U R P H O N E

Customizing phone settings

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can download any compatible ringtone directly to your smartphone (see Downloading files from a web page). You can also download ringtones to your computer and then email them to your smartphone.

Selecting ringtones

You can set various tones for various types of incoming calls.

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Options

, and then select

Sound

Preferences

.

4

Select the

Application


Ring Tones

.

5

Select the

Volume

pick list and select the volume level.

6

Select the

Vibrate

pick list and select when you want your smartphone to vibrate for an incoming call.

7

(Optional) Check the

Escalate ring tone volume

box if you want the ring to play softly and then increase to full volume the longer it rings.

8

Select a ringtone from the pick list to identify each of the following:

Known Caller:

An incoming call from someone in your Contacts or Favorites.

Unknown Caller:

An incoming call from someone identified by caller ID who is not in your Contacts or Favorites. This includes callers that have blocked their caller ID.

76 C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S

Y O U R P H O N E

3

9

Select

Done

.

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can assign a ringtone to a contact or an entire category of contacts.

Creating and managing ringtones

You can also record sounds and use them as ringtones.

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Options

, and then select

Sound

Preferences

.

4

Select

Manage

.

5


•

To record a sound, select

New

.

•

To play a sound, select it with the

5-way

.

•

To delete a sound, highlight it and press

Backspace

.

•

To send a sound, highlight it and select

Send

.

6

Select

Done

twice.

TIP

You can also create a new sound by selecting

New

in Sound & Alerts Preferences.

Selecting Phone alert tones

You can set various tones for various types of alerts.

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Options

, and then select

Sound

Preferences

.

4

Select the

Application


Phone Alerts

.

5

Select the

Volume


6

Select the

Vibrate

pick list and select when you want your smartphone to vibrate for a phone alert.

7

Select an alert tone from the pick list for each of the following:

C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S 77

3

Y O U R P H O N E

Voicemail Alert:

Plays when you have new voicemail.

Coverage in/out:

Plays when you move into or out of a coverage area.

8

Select

Done

.

Adjusting call volume

While a call is in progress, press the

Volume button on the side of your smartphone to adjust the call volume.

•

•

To increase the volume, press the upper half of the

Volume

button.

To decrease the volume, press the lower half of the

Volume

button.

the side of your smartphone to adjust ringer volume, and then press the

Side

button to confirm your selection.

Barring calls

Call Barring lets you prevent unauthorized calls on your smartphone. You must enter your Call Barring password every time you change your Call Barring preferences.

Contact your wireless service provider if you do not know this password or if you need more information.

TIP

Call barring may not be available in some areas.

Volume

Side button

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Options

, and then select

Call

Barring

.

4

Select the

Outgoing

and

Incoming

pick lists, and then select the type of calls you want to prevent.

5

Select

OK

.

Adjusting ringer volume

When a call is not in progress and music is not playing, press the

Volume

button on


Y O U R P H O N E

3

Customizing the Main tab in the Phone application

Phone Display Options let you customize the appearance and entry mode of the

Main tab in the Phone application.

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Options

, and then select

Phone

Display Options

.

4


Wallpaper:

Sets the wallpaper that appears on the Main tab in the Phone application. To change the wallpaper, select the thumbnail image and then select an image to use as wallpaper.

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can also set the background for Agenda View in Calendar. See

Customizing display options for your calendar for details.

Fade:

Adjusts the intensity level of the wallpaper image.

Typing…:

Sets whether typing in the

Main tab in the Phone app displays the

Dial Pad and enters numbers you want to dial, or whether it displays the

Contacts tab and starts a contacts search.

You can select

Typing starts Contacts search

to dial by name or number from the Main tab. Now when you start typing in the Main tab, the phone app switches to the Contacts tab and searches Contacts. If no match is found in Contacts, the phone app switches to the Dial Pad tab if you press numerical keys.

TIP

If you select the

Typing starts contacts search

option, you can still enter a phone number from the Main tab in the Phone app by pressing

Option

followed by the number.

Show Calendar event:

Sets whether the current event from the Calendar application appears in the Main tab in the Phone app. When this option is enabled, you can then select this event to jump to the Calendar app.

Default View:

Sets the tab that appears when you press

Phone

.


3

Y O U R P H O N E

5

Select

OK

.

Setting your dialing preferences

Dialing preferences let you assign a prefix to your phone numbers. For example, you can automatically dial a 1 before all 10-digit phone numbers. You can add a different prefix based on the length of the phone number.

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Options

, and then select

Dial

Preferences

.

4


Dialing from North America:

Formats phone numbers using North American conventions (XXX-XXX-XXXX).

Always dial +1 in front of the area code:

Adds a 1 in front of 10-digit phone numbers. This option is available only when Dialing from North America is enabled.

To 7 digit numbers:

Adds a prefix to

7-digit numbers. For example, enter your own area code to automatically add your area code when you dial local numbers.

To (6), (5), (4), digit numbers:

Adds a prefix to numbers that are only six, five, or four numerals long. For example, if all the phone numbers in your office have the 408 area code and a 555 exchange, followed by a 4-digit extension, select

4

and enter the prefix

408555

. To call a colleague, simply dial your colleague’s

4-digit extension; your smartphone automatically dials the rest and makes the call. You can also create contact entries with just the extension number and then dial the number from your

Contacts list.

5

Select

OK

.


Y O U R P H O N E

3

Manually selecting the wireless network

You may be able to search for other wireless network services in your current location.

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Select Network

from the

Options

menu.

4

Select another network, if available.

5

Select

OK

.

Using TTY

A TTY (also known as TDD or text telephone) is a telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf or hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities, to communicate by telephone.

Your smartphone is compatible with select

TTY devices. You can connect a TTY/TDD machine to your smartphone through the headset jack, but you cannot use your headset jack with a headset while this mode is enabled. Please check with the manufacturer of your TTY device for connectivity information and to ensure that the TTY device supports digital wireless transmission.

To use TTY, you may need to make additional arrangements with your wireless service provider. Please contact your wireless service provider’s customer service department for more information.

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Select the

Dial Pad

tab.

3

Enter

#*TTY.

4

Press

Send

.

5

When a message appears indicating that TTY is enabled, select

OK

. To disable TTY, repeat these steps.

TIP

A red

T

appears at the top of the Phone screen to indicate that TTY is enabled.


3

Y O U R P H O N E

What are all those icons?

You can monitor the status of several items using icons in the title bar in the Phone application:

0

Your phone is on and you are in your wireless service provider’s coverage area. If you are outside a coverage area, No Service or

No Service—SOS Only appears instead. No Service means that there is no coverage at all and

No Service—SOS Only means that you can call only emergency numbers, such as

112. When you turn off your phone, Phone Off appears.

Call forwarding is active.

Your phone is on. The bars display the signal strength. The stronger the signal, the more bars that appear. If you are outside a coverage area, no bars appear.

Your phone is on and a GPRS or

EDGE network is within range, but you are not actively transmitting data. You can still make and receive calls.

Your phone is on and a GPRS or

EDGE data connection is active.

82 W H A T A R E A L L T H O S E I C O N S ?

You have new voicemail messages. You can select this icon to retrieve your messages.

If you have alternate line service

(ALS), the left side is shaded when you have voicemail on line 1, and the right side is shaded when you have voicemail on line 2.

You have a new alert, such as a

Calendar alarm or a new text message. To view the alert, press and hold

Center

or select the icon. See Viewing and using the alerts.

The Bluetooth wireless technology icon appears in gray when this feature is off, in blue when this feature is on, and in reverse blue when your smartphone is communicating with another Bluetooth device.

Y O U R P H O N E

3

This icon replaces the Bluetooth icon when your smartphone is connected to a Bluetooth hands-free device. This icon appears in dark blue when a call is in progress and in light blue when a call is

not

in progress.

This icon replaces the Bluetooth icon when your smartphone is connected to your computer using a dial-up networking

(DUN) connection.

Your battery is partially drained.

When the battery drains to 20% of its capacity, the icon changes from blue to red. At 10% of its capacity, you begin to receive warning messages, and at 5% of its capacity, the smartphone beeps (if the Ringer switch is in the Sound On position) and the icon changes from red to clear.

Your battery is being charged.

The lightning bolt turns from red to green when the battery is fully charged and your smartphone remains connected to the charger.

W H A T A R E A L L T H O S E I C O N S ?

83

3

Y O U R P H O N E

Your battery is fully charged and your smartphone is not connected to the charger.

You have new text or multimedia messages. The number next to the icon indicates the number of unread messages in your Inbox. You can select this icon to retrieve your messages.

You have new email messages.

The number next to the icon indicates the number of unread messages in your Inbox. If you set up multiple email accounts on your smartphone, this number reflects only the account that you most recently accessed. You can select this icon to retrieve your messages.

KEY TERM

GPRS

(General Packet Radio

Service) A mobile connectivity technology that provides persistent data connections.

(Additional charges may apply.)

KEY TERM

EDGE

(Enhanced Data rate for GSM

Evolution) An enhanced version of GPRS that delivers data speeds that are up to three times faster than standard GPRS connections.


DID YOU KNOW

?

You can tap the

Bluetooth

icon to quickly turn Bluetooth wireless features on and off.

TIP

To display the remaining battery power, tap the

battery

icon at the top of the screen.

84 W H A T A R E A L L T H O S E I C O N S ?

Your email and other messages

You already know how efficient email and messaging are for staying in touch. Now your Palm

®

Treo

™

680 smartphone brings you a new level of convenience: email on the go. Enjoy the ease and speed of communicating with friends, family, and colleagues anywhere you can access your wireless service provider’s data network.

You can send photos to your friends and family, or create

Microsoft Word or Excel files and send them to your colleagues. You can also receive attachments to view and edit at your convenience.

Benefits

•

Access email on the go

•

Send and receive photos, sound files, Word and Excel files, and more

•

Save messages from your computer to view at a convenient time

C H A P T E R

4

In this chapter

Which email application should I use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

The VersaMail

® application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S

4

Which email application should I use?

The VersaMail application

®

Your smartphone includes the VersaMail

® application (called Email in Applications

View), which you can use to access your corporate, personal, and fee-based Internet email. You can also access web-based email, like Yahoo! Mail or Hotmail, from the web browser on your smartphone.

KEY TERM

Email provider

The service you use to send and receive email. Your email provider’s name appears between the @ symbol and the dot in your email address.

KEY TERM

Email application

It’s not an email provider, but an application on your smartphone that gives you a way to view and manage email.

An email application just transfers messages from an account that you have already set up with a provider.

NOTE

You must activate data services on your wireless service provider account before you can use email on your smartphone.

Before you can use VersaMail, you need to enter your email account settings. If you have multiple email accounts, you must enter settings for each email account.

After you enter your email account settings, see the

User Guide for the

VersaMail Application

on your computer for info on sending and receiving messages and customizing your VersaMail settings.

Windows:

Start > Programs > Palm

Mac

: Insert the Palm Installation CD and click the link to the



in the

Documentation

folder.

How do I get started?

1

If either of the following is true, read the

User Guide for the VersaMail

Application

on your computer:

•

You used the VersaMail application on your previous Palm OS

®

device, and

W H I C H E M A I L A P P L I C A T I O N S H O U L D I U S E ?

87

4

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S you want to transfer those settings to your smartphone.

•

You plan to use VersaMail to access an email account on a Microsoft

Exchange ActiveSync server, a Lotus

Notes server, or a Microsoft MAPI server.

2

If your email provider is listed in the following table, then skip to Setting up

VersaMail to work with common providers.

Australia:

Bigpond Mail and OptusNet.

Belgium

: Scarlet, Skynet, Swing, and

Tiscali Belgium.

Brazil:

UOL.

Canada:

Rogers High Speed and

Sympatico.

Denmark:

Cybercity, Sonofon, TDC, and

Tiscali.

Finland:

TeliaSonera.

France:

9 Telecom, Cegetel,

Club-Internet, Free, Freesurf, La Poste,

Noos, Orange, SFR.net, Tele2, Tiscali,

Wanadoo, and yahoo!.

Germany:

debitel E-Mail, E-Plus imail,

Freenet Email-Office, GMX eMail,

T-online eMail, Vodafone eMail, and

Web.de E-Mail.

Hong Kong:

1O1O, 3-DUALBAND-,

Netvigator (IMS), and One2Free.

Ireland:

o2 Ireland and Vodafone

Ireland.

Italy:

interfree, kataweb, libero, Tim, tin.It, and Tiscali.

Malaysia:

Jaring and Maxis Net.

Mexico:

Mensaje Telcel and yahoo!.

Netherlands:

@Home, Chello, Het Net,

Planet Internet, Tiscali, Wanadoo,

XS4ALL, and Zonnet.

New Zealand:

Vodafone NZ.

Norway:

Telenor and Netcom.

Philippines:

GlobeQuest and Pacific

Internet - PH.

Singapore:

Pacific Internet, Singnet, and StarHub.

Spain:

Movistar, Telefonica, Terra.es,

Vodafone, and Wanadoo.

88 T H E V E R S A M A I L

®

A P P L I C A T I O N


4

Sweden:

Bredbandsbolaget, Chello,

Com Hem, Tele2, TeliaSonera Mail,

Vodafone Euromail, and yahoo!.

Switzerland:

Bluewin, GMX, green.ch,

Orange, Sunrise (my), Sunrise Freesurf,

SwissOnline, Tiscali, and yahoo!.

Taiwan:

HiNet Umail.

Thailand:

AIS Mail.

United Kingdom:

Blueyonder, BT

Internet, BT Openworld, BT Yahoo!,

Clara.net, Demon, Freeserve, Lycos,

NTL, O2, Orange, Pipex, Tiscali, UK

Online, Virgin, Vodafone, Wanadoo, and yahoo!.

United States:

AOL, Apple.Mac, AT&T

Worldnet, Bell South, Cablevision,

Charter, Comcast, CompuServe,

EarthLink, Gmail, Mail.com, NetZero,

Speakeasy, Verizon DSL, and Yahoo!.

3

If your email provider’s name is not listed, then you need to obtain the following info from your system administrator or ISP, and then skip to

Setting up VersaMail to work with other providers:

•

•

•

•

Mail protocol: POP or IMAP

Incoming and outgoing mail server names, such as mail.myisp.com

Incoming and outgoing mail server port numbers, such as 110 (incoming

POP), 143 (incoming IMAP), or 25

(outgoing POP or IMAP)

(If necessary) Security settings: APOP,

ESMTP, SSL

Setting up VersaMail to work with common providers

1

Press

Applications

and select

Email

to open the VersaMail application.

2

If prompted to select an initial setup option, select

Continue

.

3

Make up a name that describes this account and enter it in the

Account

Name

field. For example, Work Email.

4

Select the

Mail Service

pick list, and then select your email provider, such as

EarthLink, and then select

Next

.

T H E V E R S A M A I L

®

A P P L I C A T I O N 89

4


5

Enter the username for your email account. Your username usually appears before the @ symbol in your email address.

NOTE

For some email providers, such as

Gmail, your username is your entire email address. Check with your email provider if you are not sure what to enter as your username.

Setting up VersaMail to work with other providers

1

Press

Applications

and select

Email

to open the VersaMail application.

2

If prompted to select an initial setup option, then select

Continue

.

3

Make up a name that describes this account and enter it in the

Account

Name

field. For example, Work Email.

4

Select the

Mail Service

pick list, and then select

Other

.

5

Select the

Protocol

pick list, select

POP

or

IMAP

(based on the info you got from your system administrator or ISP), and then select

Next

.

6

Select the

Password

box, enter your email account password, select

OK

, and then select

Next

.

7

Select

Next

, and then select

Done

.

TIP

To enter settings for another email account, open the

Accounts

menu and select

Account Setup

.


®



4

6

Enter the username for your email account. Your username usually appears before the @ symbol in your email address.

NOTE

For some email providers, such as

Gmail, your username is your entire email address. Check with your email provider if you are not sure what to enter as your username.

Creating and sending messages

1

From the Inbox, select

•

•

First name

Last name

New

.

2

Begin entering one of the following for the addressee:

•

Email address

7

Select the

Password

box, enter your email account password, select

OK

, and then select

Next

.

8

Enter your email address and the names of the incoming and outgoing mail servers, and then select

Next

.

9

If your system administrator or ISP provided port numbers or security settings, select

Advanced

, and then enter those settings.

TIP

If you enter address info that matches one or more of your contacts, VersaMail displays the matching contacts. To accept a suggestion, select the correct contact. To send to a different address, keep entering the email address or name.

3

Enter the subject and message text.

TIP

To move between fields, press

Up

or

Down

on the 5-way.

10

TIP

You can also select

Advanced

to set more options for incoming and outgoing messages.

Select

Done

.

4

Select one of the following:

Send:

Connects and sends all messages immediately. If the message cannot be sent for any reason, the message is stored in your Outbox.

Outbox:

Puts the message in the

Outbox to send later.


®


4


Drafts:

Saves the message so you can continue working on it at another time.

Attaching photos and videos

1

Create the message to which you want to attach the photo or video.

2

On the New Message screen, select the

red paper clip

icon in the upper-right corner.

3

From the

Type

pick list, select

Photo/

Video

.

DID YOU KNOW

?

VersaMail makes up to five attempts to send a message; if it is still not successful, an alert message appears and you must try to manually send the message again.

.

Adding attachments to your messages

You can attach several types of files to your email messages.

TIP

To remove an attachment, select the file in the

Attachments


Delete

.

.

4

On the Select Media screen, select the

Album

pick list to go to the album containing the photo or video you want, and then check the box to the left of the photo or video.

5

Select

Done

.

TIP

To attach more than one file to a message, repeat steps 3 and 4.


®



4

Attaching ringtones

1

Create the message to which you want to attach the ringtone.

2


red paper clip


3

From the

Type

pick list, select

Sounds

.

4

5

TIP

Ringtones that are copy-protected appear in the Sounds application with a lock icon. You can use these ringtones on your phone, but you cannot send them as attachments.

Select the ringtone you want, and then select

Select

Insert

Done

.

.

3

4

5

From the

Documents

Select

Type

Done

.

.

pick list, select

Select the file you want on the

Documents screen.

Attaching other types of files

1

Create the message to which you want to attach the item.

2


red paper clip


3

From the

Type

pick list, select the type of file to attach—for example,

Address

,

Appointment

, or

Memo/Text

.

4

Select the item you want from the list in the

Type

box.

5

Select

Done

.

Attaching Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and

PDF files

1

Create the message to which you want to attach the file.

2


red paper clip


Receiving and viewing messages

1

From any mailbox, select

Get

or

Get &

Send

.

2

From the Inbox, select the message you want to view.


®


4


3

If a large incoming message is truncated, select

More

.

TIP

When viewing a message, tap the

scroll arrows

at the top of the screen to view the previous or next message.

4

Select

Done

.

Replying to or forwarding messages

When you respond to messages, you can select whether to include the original text

(see Customizing your email settings).

DID YOU KNOW

?

The VersaMail application sends all messages as plain text only, with all

HTML tags stripped, even if you are forwarding or replying to a message that was originally received as HTML.

1

From the Inbox or another folder, open the message you want to respond to.

2

In Message View, select

Reply

. Select whether to reply to just the sender or to reply to both the sender and all addressees on the message.

3

Enter your reply.

4

Select

Send

.

Viewing attachments

There are a number of attachment types you can open with the built-in software on your smartphone (for example,

Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and

PDF files; ringtones; and photos).


®



4

1

From any folder, open the message with the attachment you want to view.

Messages with downloaded attachments appear with a

paper clip

icon to the left of the message icon.

3

When you finish with the attachment, select

Done

to return to the

Attachments dialog box.

NOTE

If there is no Done button, press

Applications

and select

Email

to return to the account’s Inbox.

2

TIP

If an attachment is not downloaded because it is larger than your maximum message size, the paper clip icon does not appear, and the attachment does not display at the bottom of the message screen. Select

More

to download and display any attachments. However, if the attachment is larger than the limit set by IT or by the email provider, the attachment is not downloaded.

Tap the attachment name at the bottom of the message screen to view it in the default viewer on your smartphone.

TIP

You can also tap the folder icon to the left of the attachment name to open a menu of tasks you can do with the attachment, including View, Install, or Unzip, depending on the attachment file type; Save to card to save the attachment to an expansion card; or select

Viewer

to select the application you want to use to view the attachment.

0

Managing your messages

The status icons that appear near the messages in your Inbox indicate the following:

The message is unread when the subject appears in bold.

The message includes an attachment.

The message includes a meeting invitation.

This message has high priority.

You can rearrange the message list to make it easier to find and view messages.

•

In the Inbox, select

Sort

, and then select one of the following:

Sort by

Date

,

Sort by Name

,

Sort by Subject

.


®


4


•

To quickly switch between folders in list view, select the

folder

pick list at the top of the screen and select the desired folder.

Deleting selected messages from the

Inbox

When you delete a message from the

Inbox, it moves to the Trash folder.

1

Select the bullet next to the icon of each message that you want to delete. To select adjacent messages, drag the stylus so it touches the bullet to the left of each message. Lift the stylus and drag again to select more adjacent messages.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Delete

on the

Message

menu.

4

If a confirmation dialog box appears, select

OK

to confirm deletion.

TIP

To delete a single message, select the

envelope

icon next to the message, and then select

Delete

from the list.

Deleting messages by date

You can quickly delete a group of messages by selecting a range of dates.

1

Press

Menu

.

2

Select

Delete Old

on the

Message

3

4

menu.

Select the folder and a date range for the messages you want to delete.

Select

OK

.

5

If a confirmation dialog box appears, select

OK

to confirm deletion.

TIP

To empty (or purge) the Trash folder, open the

Message

menu and select

Empty Trash

.

Switching accounts

If you create more than one email account in VersaMail, you need to switch from account to account to get, send, and otherwise manage the messages in each account.

1

Press

Menu

.

2

Select

Accounts

, and then select an account.


®



4

DID YOU KNOW

?

If you assigned VersaMail to a quick button, you can press that button repeatedly to switch between your different email accounts.

Scheduling Auto Sync

You can set up VersaMail to automatically download new email messages to your smartphone with the Auto Sync feature.

Customizing your email settings

You can customize the VersaMail settings for each individual email account on your smartphone. The preferences you set apply only to the email account you are currently viewing. If you have multiple accounts, configure each account separately.

You can set up a schedule to automatically retrieve email messages; set preferences for how and when messages are retrieved; add a signature to an outgoing message; and more. For complete information on all of the email settings you can customize, see the

User Guide for the VersaMail

Application

on your computer.

Windows:


Mac




in the

Documentation

folder.

TIP

You need to set up a separate Auto Sync schedule for each email account. This feature may not work with email accounts that require

VPN connection.

1

Press

Menu

.

2

Select

Options

, and then select

Preferences

.

3

Select

Auto Sync

.

4

Check the

Auto-sync

box.

5

Select the

Every

pick list and select the time interval, from

5 minutes

to

12 hours

.


®


4


NOTE

If you set a more frequent interval, you may need to recharge your smartphone battery more often.

6

Select the

Start Time

and

End Time

boxes, and then select the hour, the minute, and AM or PM to enter the time for the first and last Auto Sync to take place. Select

OK

.

7

Select the days you want the schedule to be active. You can choose any number of days, but you can set up only one schedule for each email account.

8

Select

OK

, and then select

Get Mail

.

1

From any mailbox screen, press

Menu

.

2

Select

Options

, and then select

Preferences

.

3

Select

Alerts

.

4

Check the

Alert me of new mail

box.

TIP

To receive notifications of successful Auto

Sync retrievals only, uncheck the

Alert me of auto sync failures

box. Leave the box checked if you want to receive notifications of both successful and failed Auto Sync retrievals.

TIP

After you set up a scheduled Auto Sync and select Get Mail, from then on, only new messages are retrieved during Auto Sync.

5

Select the

Alert Sound

pick list, and then select a sound. Your smartphone plays a brief demo of the sound.

6

Select

OK

.

Selecting alert tones

When you schedule Auto Sync for a given account, you can choose a sound—such as a bird, a phone, or an alarm—to let you know when new email arrives.

Setting preferences for getting messages

1


Menu

.

2

Select

Options

, and then select

Preferences

.

3

Select

Incoming

.


®



4

4

Set any of the following preferences, and then select

OK

.

Get:

Indicates whether to get message subjects only or entire messages.

Ask Every Time:

Indicates if you want to see a dialog box for selecting subjects only or entire messages each time you retrieve email. If the box is unchecked, messages are retrieved according to the option you select in the

Get pick list.

Unread messages (IMAP accounts only):

Downloads only unread mail to your smartphone. If you don’t check this box and you select Get & Send, all the messages on your mail server are downloaded to your Inbox, including messages you’ve read.

TIP

The POP protocol does not support retrieval of unread mail only from the server. If you have a POP email account, VersaMail downloads all messages regardless of whether you have read them, and regardless of whether the Unread messages box is checked.

Mail from last:

Gets messages sent within the number of days you specify.

Download attachments:

Automatically downloads files attached to email, except for attachments that exceed the maximum message size.

Maximum message size:

Sets the maximum size of an incoming email message. Enter the size in kilobytes

(KB). The default is 5KB, but you can enter any size up to 2048KB

[approximately 2 megabytes (MB)], including attachments. The maximum message size that you can retrieve is

60KB for the body text and approximately 5MB of total data for any attachments.

Message Format:

Sets the format for messages you retrieve.


®


4


•

HTML:

Displays messages sent in

HTML format with basic formatting intact and displays other messages as plain text.

•

Text:

Displays all messages as plain text, regardless of the format in which they were sent.

Attaching a signature to a message

You can attach a personal signature, with info like your company’s address and phone numbers, to the bottom of all messages you send.

1


Menu

.

2

Select

Options

, and then select

Preferences

.

3

Select

Signature

.

4

Check the

Attach Signature

box.

5

Enter your signature information, and then select

OK

.

Working with Microsoft Exchange

ActiveSync

Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync works with the VersaMail, Calendar, and Contacts apps on your smartphone to directly access corporate groupware information on a

Microsoft Exchange 2003 server. You can synchronize business email, calendar, and contact info with the Exchange 2003 server from your smartphone without using a desktop computer.

When you create a Microsoft Exchange

ActiveSync account in the VersaMail application, your email, calendar, and contact info sync directly with the

Exchange server; information does not sync with the desktop software application on your computer, such as Microsoft

Outlook or Palm Desktop software. Other information that is stored on your computer, such as tasks and memos, continues to synchronize with your desktop software.

The Exchange server pushes email messages, Calendar events, meeting invitations, and updated contact information it receives onto your smartphone. Likewise, when you create an email message or event or you update a contact on your smartphone, it can be pushed to the server.


®



4

For complete info on using a Microsoft

Exchange ActiveSync account, see the

User Guide for the VersaMail Application

on your computer.

Windows:


Mac




in the

Documentation

folder.

pricing and availability of messaging services.

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can address messages to multiple recipients by separating the addresses with a comma. If you address a single message to three people, you will be billed for three messages.

DID YOU KNOW

?

Your smartphone turns on and an alert appears whenever you receive a new message. To save battery life, you can turn alerts off for your Exchange ActiveSync account. Go to the account, press

Menu

, select

Options

, and then select

Preferences

.

Select

Alerts

, and then uncheck the alert box.

Creating and sending a text message

Each text message can have up to

160 characters. Messages with more than

160 characters are automatically split into several messages. (If you send a text message to an email address, the email address is deducted from the

160-character count.)

Messaging

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can page someone to call you by sending them a blank text message.

You can use the Messaging application to exchange brief text messages (SMS) and multimedia messages (MMS) with other devices and email addresses that support these forms of messaging. Before you use your smartphone to send or receive messages, refer to your service plan for

1

Press

Messaging

.

2

Select

New

.

3

Select the

To

field to address the message:

•

Press

Center

. If the recipient’s name appears in the list of recent addresses, select it from the list.

M E S S A G I N G 101

4


•

If the recipient is in your Contacts list, enter the first initial and last name (no spaces), and then select the recipient’s phone number or email address, depending on where you want to send the message.

•

If the recipient’s name isn’t in the list of recent addresses or your Contacts list, enter the phone number or email address.

NOTE

Some symbols can’t be used in text messages. The Messaging application automatically replaces invalid characters.

TIP

If you see numbers when you expect to see letters (or the other way around), you need to turn Option Lock on by pressing

Option

twice or turn it off by pressing

Option

once.

5

Select

Send

.

NOTE


TIP

Select

Save as Draft

to save a draft of the message without sending it. To access the draft, select the

category


Drafts

.

4

Enter your message or select

QuickText

to insert predefined phrases. To insert emoticons, select .

TIP

To add a new QuickText phrase, select

Edit QuickText

from the list.

102 M E S S A G I N G


4

0

Creating and sending a multimedia message

KEY TERM

Slide

A collection of text, pictures, videos, and sounds that are grouped together within a multimedia message. During playback, all the items within a particular slide appear on the same screen. If a multimedia message contains multiple slides, each slide can be viewed separately during playback.

Multimedia messages consist of text, photos, videos, and sounds presented as one or more slides.You can include any of the following items:

1

2

3

Item

Pictures

Supported File Types

JPEG, GIF, WBMP

Videos

Ringtones

MPEG4, 3GGP, 3GPP2

MIDI, AAC, AAC+, MP3

Sound clips AMR, QCELP, MP3

Press

Select

Select

Messaging

New

.

Add Media

.

.

4

Select the

To

field to address the message with up to 25 addresses:

•

Press

Center

. If the recipient’s name appears in the list of recent addresses, select it from the list.

•

If the recipient is in your Contacts list, enter the first initial and last name (no spaces), and then select the recipient’s phone number or email address.

•

If the recipient’s name is not in the list of recent addresses or your Contacts list, enter the phone number or email address.

5

Enter a subject.

6

Select the image placeholder, and then select one of the following:

Attach image:

Insert one photo or video from your smartphone or an expansion card.

Take new picture:

Take a picture with the built-in camera and add it to the message.

Take new video:

Capture a short video with the built-in camcorder and add it to the message.


4


10

(Optional) Select

Preview

to view the message as the recipient will see it.

11

(Optional) Press

Menu

, and then select

High Priority

from the

Compose

menu to mark the message as urgent.

12

Select

Send

.

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can send a contact or calendar entry. Select the entry, open the

Record

menu, select

Send

, and then select

Messaging

.

TIP

When creating a message, you can preview or delete an item. Highlight the item, press

Center

on the 5-way, and then select

Remove

,

View

, or

Play

.

7

(Optional) Select

Sound


Record new:

Record a sound clip of up to 1 minute.

Attach voice memo:

Select a memo you recorded in the Voice Memo application.

Attach ringtone:

Select a ringtone.

8

Enter a text message or caption.

9

Select

Add slide

to insert additional slides.

Receiving messages

When your phone is turned on and is in an area of wireless coverage, you automatically receive new text messages.

For multimedia messages, you can set your smartphone to automatically download new messages or to notify you that a message is ready to be downloaded

(see Customizing your Messaging settings). You can also configure how your smartphone notifies you when a new message arrives (see Selecting Messaging alert tones).



4

The new message alert may include any of the following buttons:

•

•

•

•

•

OK:

Dismisses the alert and places the message in your Inbox.

Reply:

Opens Chat View, where you can reply with a text message. To send an MMS reply, select

Add

from Chat

View.

Call Back:

Dials the sender’s phone number.

Go To Msg:

Opens the message so you can view its full contents.

Delete:

Moves the message from your

Inbox to the Deleted folder.

TIP

When you receive a message, you can also press

Send

to call the sender.

TIP

If you have multiple alerts, the Alert dialog box displays all your pending alerts. Select an item’s description to jump to that item, or check the box to clear that item. To view all your pending alerts from any screen on your smartphone, press and hold

Center

on the

5-way.

Using links in messages

When you receive a text message that contains a telephone number, email address, or URL, you can dial the number, send an email message, or go to the web page immediately.

1

Press

Messaging

.

2

Select the message that contains the link you want to use.

3

Select the phone number, email address, or URL (appears as underlined blue text).

Your smartphone automatically launches the appropriate application from the link.


4


Viewing/playing a multimedia message

1

2

4

Press

•

Messaging

.

Select the message you want to view.

3

If there are sounds or multiple slides, playback begins immediately.


Use the onscreen controls to scroll to other slides and messages.

•

To save a picture, press

Menu

, and select

Save Picture

from the

Message

menu. You can access saved pictures later by pressing

Applications

and selecting

Pics&Videos

.

•

To copy the text, use the stylus to highlight the text, then press

Menu

, select

Edit

, and then select

Copy

.

•

To stop playback of a message, select

Play/Stop

.

•

To view message details, press

Menu

and select

Message Details

from the

Message

menu.

•

•

To save a calendar or contact entry, open the message details. You can access saved entries later by pressing

To save a sound, press

Menu

, select

Save Sound

from the

Message

menu. You can access saved sounds later by pressing

Applications

and selecting

Sounds

or

Voice Memo

.

5

Applications

Calendar

Select

OK

.

Contacts

(depending on the type of entry you saved).

and selecting



4

Arranging your messages

You can rearrange the messages in any folder by using the Sort command.

1

Press

Messaging

.

1

Press

Messaging

.

2

Select the folder list in the title bar and select the folder that contains the messages you want to delete.

3

Press

Menu

.

4

Select

Purge

from the

Message

menu.

5

Select the

Purge

pick list, and then select an option.

6

Select

OK

.

Chatting with Messaging

2

Select the folder list in the title bar and select the folder you want to sort.

3

Press

Menu

.

4

Select

View

, and then select

Sort by

Name

or

Sort by Date

.

Deleting messages

You can delete several messages at once from any folder by using the Purge command.

TIP

To delete an individual message, highlight it in the message list, and then select

Delete

.

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can send and receive text messages even while you are on a phone call.

This is easiest when using a hands-free device or the speakerphone.

When you exchange more than one message with a single contact, the messages you exchange with that person are grouped into a chat session. When you select a chat session from your message list, the upper part of Chat View displays all messages you’ve exchanged with this contact, and the lower part provides an entry area.


4


You can carry on multiple chats at the same time and easily switch between them, using the pick list at the top of the screen.

3

Enter your message.

TIP

Pale gray text indicates that a message is pending or enroute.

TIP

To find a chat you had with someone, open your Messaging Inbox and select a chat session.

4

Select

Send

.

1

2

Press icon.

Messaging

and reply to it.

.


Start a new chat:

Select a message

Continue an existing chat:

message that displays the

Select a

Chat

Customizing your Messaging settings

1

Press

Messaging

.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

From the

Options

menu, select

Preferences

.

4

On the

Messages

tab, set any of the following preferences for your individual messages:



4

Create new messages as:

Indicates whether text or multimedia messaging is the default format for a new message.

Request Receipts (MMS only):

Indicates whether you want to receive a confirmation when an outgoing MMS message is delivered.

NOTE

If your wireless service provider supports delivery receipts for text messages, an additional setting appears here.

5

Select the

Chat

tab and set any of the following preferences for chat sessions.

Confirm message deletions:

Indicates whether you want deletion confirmation prompts to appear.

Privacy Mode (hide text):

Indicates whether you want the body text to appear in the alert when you receive a new message, or whether you want the alert to hide the text and prompt you to go to the message.

Message validity period:

Indicates how long you want an outgoing message to be valid.

Create chats from messages:

Indicate when you want to group messages from the same person into a chat.

Show timestamps in chats:

Indicate whether you want to see the local date and time the message was sent next to each message.

Display my name in chat window as:

Enter the name you want to use as the label for your messages in Chat View.

Label color:

Select a color to differentiate your messages from the sender’s messages while in Chat View.

Use color for:

Indicate whether you want both your name and message text


4

Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S in the selected label color, or only your name.

6

Select the

Network

tab and set any of the following preferences for network connections.

NOTE

We recommend that you do not change the Network Configuration settings.

7

Select

OK

.

Selecting Messaging alert tones

DID YOU KNOW

?

Your smartphone includes a silent alert that can vibrate even when the

Ringer switch is set to Sound Off.

Automatically collect MMS messages:

Indicate whether you want to download multimedia messages automatically.

Even when roaming:

Indicate whether you want to automatically receive multimedia messages while roaming.

Network Configuration:

Indicate if you want to use Automatic or Manual message retrieval. If you select Manual, select

Edit

and enter your wireless service provider’s settings.

1

Press

Messaging

.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Options

, and then select

Alerts

.

4

Select the

Application


Messaging

.

5

Select the

Volume




4

6

Select the

Vibrate

pick list and select when you want your smartphone to vibrate.

7

Select the

Message Tone

pick list and select a tone for incoming message alerts for a message alert.

8

Check the boxes if you want to see onscreen alerts when a new message arrives and when a message you sent is received.

9

Select

Done

.

What are all those icons?

The following icons show the message type and additional status info:

A text message

A chat session

A multimedia message that is ready for you to download

A multimedia message that is fully downloaded

A multimedia message that is fully downloaded and contains sound

A voicemail page

TIP

By default, the Messaging app shows the

Inbox folder. To view a different folder, select the folder list in the title bar and select a different folder from the list.

A message that is waiting to be sent

A receipt, which you requested, confirming delivery of the message

An outgoing message with an error

•

•

•

The message descriptions in the Inbox,

Outbox, and Sent folders show the message status:

Unread messages appear in bold.

Read messages appear in plain text.

Urgent messages appear with a red exclamation point (!).

DID YOU KNOW

?

If you are outside a coverage area or if your phone is turned off, outgoing messages go into the Outbox. When you return to a coverage area or turn your phone on, your pending messages are automatically sent and transferred to the Sent folder.


4



Your connections to the web and wireless devices

You use the web for many things: driving directions, shopping, news, web-based email. Now, with your wireless service provider network and the built-in web browser, you can take the web with you almost anywhere.

The built-in Bluetooth

®

feature of your Palm

®

Treo

™

680 smartphone helps you easily set up wireless connections to a number of devices, so you can enjoy the convenience of cable-free connectivity. You can also use your smartphone to connect your computer to the Internet and to share contacts or your favorite photos with other people.

Benefits

•

Carry the web with you

•

Store web pages for offline viewing

•

•

Connect to Bluetooth headsets and car kits

Connect your computer to the

Internet through your smartphone

C H A P T E R

5

In this chapter

Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Connecting your computer to the Internet through your smartphone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Connections with Bluetooth

®

devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S

5

Web browser

The Blazer

®

web browser on your smartphone provides quick and easy access to web pages. You can view most sites you use on your computer, including those with security and advanced features, such as JavaScript and frames. To browse the web, you must activate data services from your wireless service provider. format—called Optimized Mode—you can see most content without scrolling left or right. You can also switch to Wide Page

Mode if you like.

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can send email from a web page on your smartphone. Email addresses appear as links on web pages.

After you configure an email application on your smartphone, you can select an email address link to create a message to the selected address.

DID YOU KNOW

?

The security certificates and

128-bit Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption let you visit secure websites, like ones for banking and using email. Some secure sites also require specific browsers, so those may not work with your web browser.

DID YOU KNOW

?

The web browser supports

JavaScript, SSL strong encryption, and cookies, but does not support plug-ins (such as Flash or Shockwave) or Java applets.

Optimized Mode

Viewing a web page

To make viewing web pages on your smartphone a better experience, the web browser reformats web pages into a single column and resizes images. In this

W E B B R O W S E R 115

5


Wide Page Mode

1

Press

Applications

and select

Web

to open the Blazer web browser. If necessary, select

Yes

to turn on your phone, and

Yes

to connect to the

Internet.

If you do not see either of these icons

in the title bar, data services are not available in your current location and you cannot connect to the Internet.

2

Enter a web page address (URL) in the

Address Bar

and select

Go

.

NOTE

If you browse to a secure web page, a

lock

icon appears in the

Address Bar.

3

Do any of the following to navigate within the web page:

View a page in wide layout format

(as on your computer): Press

Menu

, select

Options

, and then select

Wide

Page Mode

.

Scroll through the page:

In Optimized

Mode (the default format) press

Up

or

Down

. In Wide Page Mode, use all buttons on the

5-way

any direction.

to scroll in

Follow a link to another web page:

In

Optimized Mode, highlight the link by pressing

Left Right

and then press

Center

to go to the selected page. In Wide Page Mode, use the stylus to select a link.

Submit a form:

Enter the info and then select the onscreen button to submit the form. If the form doesn’t have an onscreen button, press

Return

.

TIP

To adjust the font size, open the

Options

menu and select

Font

. To fit more text on the screen, select

Small

. To make the text easier to read, select

Large

.

116 W E B B R O W S E R


5

0

4

Use the

5-way

to access any of the following icons in the title bar:

Goes to your home page.

you to open your favorite web pages quickly. Note that a bookmark is different from a saved page and different from a favorite (see Defining favorite buttons).

Opens a dialog box where you can enter a web address or view a list of recently viewed web pages.

Goes back in order through pages you viewed.

Goes forward in order through pages you viewed.

Gets the latest version of the current web page. This is sometimes called

refreshing

the web page.

Opens a list where you can select Fast mode (no images or style sheets) or Normal mode

(with images and style sheets).

DID YOU KNOW

?

The predefined bookmarks take you to pages that are optimized for your smartphone.

1

Go to the page you want to bookmark.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Add Bookmark

from the

Page

menu.

4

Change the entries in the

Name

and

Description

fields.

5

Select

OK

, and then select

OK

again.

Creating a bookmark

With bookmarks, you can instantly access a web page without entering the address every time. The web browser can store up to 100 bookmarks or saved pages, allowing


5


Saving a page

You can use the web browser to save a page for offline viewing, so you don’t need a wireless connection to view it later.

1

Go to the page you want to save.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Save Page

from the

Page

menu.

4

Select

OK

, and then select

OK

again.

1

Select the

Bookmarks View

icon.

Viewing bookmarks or saved pages

Bookmarks and saved pages both appear in

Bookmarks View. Saved pages are indicated by a small triangle in the upper-right corner of the bookmark.

2

Select the bookmark or saved page you want to view.

TIP

To go back to the last web page you viewed without selecting a bookmark, select

Page View

.

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can make Bookmarks

View the default view when you open the browser. Open the

Options

menu and select

Preferences

. Select the

Start With


Bookmarks

.

Editing or deleting a bookmark or saved page

1

In Bookmarks View, press

Menu

.

2

Select

Edit Bookmarks

from the

Bookmarks

menu.

3

Select the bookmark you want to edit or delete.

TIP

If you can’t edit, delete, or beam a bookmark, it is probably locked and these actions are prohibited.



5

4

5

Enter the desired changes or select

Delete

Select

.

OK

.

Arranging bookmarks and saved pages

Bookmarks View has ten pages where you can store and arrange bookmarks and saved pages in a way that works for you.

For example, you can store travel links on one bookmark page, stock links on another, and business links on a third page.

1

In Bookmarks View, press

Menu

.

4

Use the stylus to drag and drop a bookmark into the desired slot. You can move a bookmark within the current page or move it to a different bookmark page by dragging and dropping it on one of the

Bookmark Page

icons at the bottom of the screen.

5

Select

OK

.

2

3

Select

Edit Bookmarks

Bookmarks

menu.

from the

Enter a title for this page of bookmarks.

Downloading files from a web page

The web browser lets you download files that are recognized by one of the applications on your smartphone. When you download a file, you can open it in the application that recognizes the file. For example, if you download an MP3 file, you can listen to it later in the Pocket Tunes™ application. If a file is not recognized by any application on your smartphone you cannot open it on your smartphone. You can, however, download the file to an expansion card, transfer it to your computer using an expansion card reader (sold separately), and view it on your computer.

You can download files such as new applications and choose to play or save music and video files in many popular


5

Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S formats—provided that the website permits the downloading of files:

TIP

You can also save an image from a web page by tapping and holding it with the stylus.

Item

Pictures

Videos

Ringtones

Music

Supported File Types

JPEG, WBMP, GIF

MP4, 3G2, ASF, WMV

MIDI, AAC, AAC+, MP3

MP3, WMA

Streaming files from a web page

The web browser lets you stream files that are recognized by one of the applications on your smartphone. For example, you can choose to play music and video files in many popular formats (MP3, WMA, WMV).

TIP

You can also access software and other downloads using the Downloads bookmark.

1

Go to the page with the link to the file you want to download.

2


•

In Optimized Mode, press

Left

or

Right

to highlight the link to the file, and then press

Center

.

•

In Wide Page Mode, tap the link with your stylus.

3

If prompted, select what you want to do with the file:

Play

,

Save To Device

, or

Save To Card

.

4

Select

Yes

.

1

When the web browser recognizes streamed content on a web page, it displays a

Play

icon. To view or listen to the streamed content, select

Play

.

TIP

The web browser recognizes streamed content that is not supported by any of the applications on your smartphone, and it displays a Media type not supported message.

2

Once streaming begins, playback starts automatically. Use the following controls when viewing or listening:

•

Select to return to the web page containing the streamed content.



5

•

Select or press

Center

to pause playback.

•

Select or press

Center

to resume playback after pausing.

•

A few seconds after playback begins, the toolbar is hidden and you can view the content on the full screen. Press

Up Down

to display the toolbar; press

Up Down

again to hide the toolbar again.

•

Press the

Volume

button on the side of your smartphone to adjust the volume.

DID YOU KNOW

?

If the web browser does not recognize a phone number as dialable, you can copy the phone number (as text) and paste it into the Dial Pad (see Dialing from a web page or message).

Returning to recently viewed pages

The History list stores the addresses of the last 100 pages you visited. Items in the

History list are sorted chronologically.

1

In Page View, press

Menu

.

2

Select

History

from the

Page

menu.

3

Select the web page you want to load.

Copying text from a web page

You can copy text from a web page and paste it into other applications.

1

2

3

4

Use the stylus to highlight the text you want to copy.

Press

Select

Menu

Edit

.

, and then select

Copy

where you want to paste the text.

.

Go to the app in which you want to paste the text and position the cursor

5

Press

Menu

.

6

Select

Edit

, and then select

Paste

.

Finding text on a web page

1

In Page View, press

Menu

.

2

Select

Find Text on Page

from the

Page

menu.

3

Enter the text you want to find.

4

Check or uncheck the

Wrap Search

box to indicate whether you want the search to wrap from the end of the page to the beginning when the end is reached.

5

Select

Find

to start the search.


5


Customizing your web browser settings

1

In Page View, press

Menu

.

2

Select

Options

, and then select

Preferences

.

3

Select

Page

and set any of the following preferences: page or enter a URL directly from Page

View.

4

Select

General

and set any of the following preferences:

Start With:

Determines which view appears when you open the browser.

Home Page:

Sets the page that appears when you select .

Restore Default:

Selects the original home page, if you changed it.

Show Address Bar:

Sets whether the web address appears in Page View.

When it is visible, you can select the pick list to go to a previously viewed

Auto-complete:

Determines whether the web browser suggests text, based on your previous entries, when you begin entering info.

Disable cookies:

Determines whether websites can store personalized info on your smartphone. Some sites do not work properly if you select this option.

Disable JavaScript:

Bypasses

JavaScript elements on the web pages you view.



5

Tap and Drag:

Determines whether dragging the stylus selects text or scrolls through the content of the page.

Normal mode/Fast mode:

Determines whether a web page appears as designed (Normal mode) or with some of the items removed for faster display.

Selecting Fast mode gives you the following options:

•

Disable cascading style sheets:

Determines whether style sheets are applied when you load a web page.

When style sheets are disabled, pages download faster, but you may lose some of the formatting.

TIP

Lots of pretty graphics slowing you down?

Browse the web faster by enabling the Don’t download images! option.

5

Select

Advanced

and set any of the following preferences:

KEY TERM

Cascading Style Sheet (CSS)

A file that governs design elements of a web page, such as its fonts, colors, and layout.

•

Don’t download images!

Determines whether images appear when you load a web page. If you select not to view images, you can still see any image by selecting the placeholder box on the web page.

Set memory limit for storing pages:

Sets the amount of memory used for your cache. Pages are cached so that they load faster the next time you view them.

Cookies:

Indicates how much memory is being used by cookies. To free up this memory, select

Clear Cookies

.

Cache:

Indicates how much memory is being used by your cache to store recent pages and history. To free up this memory, select

Clear Cache

.


5


Clear cache on exit:

Determines whether the cache clears each time you exit the web browser.

Set Proxy:

Sets up a proxy server to access the Internet. If your connection requires a proxy server, please contact your Internet service provider or IT administrator for this information.

6

Select

OK

.

The following procedures describe the process of setting up your smartphone as a wireless modem using the built-in

Bluetooth technology.

TIP

If your computer is not enabled with

Bluetooth wireless technology, you need to purchase a wireless Bluetooth adapter accessory for your computer to use this feature.

Connecting your computer to the

Internet through your smartphone

Dial-up networking (DUN) is the feature that converts your smartphone into a modem so that you can access the Internet from your computer. If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology, you can set up your smartphone as a wireless modem using the built-in Bluetooth technology.

Creating a partnership between your smartphone and your computer

1

Make sure that your computer’s

Bluetooth setting is on and that your computer is ready to create a Bluetooth partnership. Check the documentation that came with your computer to find and change these settings.

2

On your smartphone, press

Applications

and select

Bluetooth

.

3

Select

Bluetooth On

if it is not already selected, and then select

Setup

Devices

.

4

Select

Trusted Devices.

124 C O N N E C T I N G Y O U R C O M P U T E R T O T H E I N T E R N E T T H R O U G H Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E


5

9

Select

Done

, and then select

Done

again to return to the Bluetooth screen.

Setting up your computer for a Bluetooth

DUN connection

Follow the instructions from the manufacturer of your Bluetooth adapter to enable DUN.

5

Select

Add Device

. The discovery icon appears, indicating that the discovery process is active.

6

Select your computer from the

Trusted

Devices

list, and then select

OK

.

7

Make up a passkey, enter it on the

Bluetooth Security screen, and then select

OK

. The passkey can be up to 16 numbers.

NOTE

You need this passkey in the next step, so be sure to write it down exactly.

We recommend that you use a passkey of

16 numbers, where possible, to improve the security of your smartphone. The longer the passkey, the more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered.

Accessing the Internet using a Bluetooth

DUN connection

The steps for accessing the Internet on your computer may vary depending on your operating system and how Bluetooth wireless technology is set up on your computer—for example, if it is built-in versus if you are using a Bluetooth adapter.

If you need additional info, check your computer’s documentation for how to set up Bluetooth technology to access the

Internet using a DUN connection.

TIP

You may need to use a virtual private network (VPN) to access corporate email.

Check with your system administrator for more information.

8

Enter the same passkey on your computer when prompted.

C O N N E C T I N G Y O U R C O M P U T E R T O T H E I N T E R N E T T H R O U G H Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E 125

5



Verify that DUN is enabled on your computer. See the documentation that came with your computer for details.

TIP

If you get a message asking whether you want your computer to remember the dial text for this connection, we recommend that you say yes. This avoids errors and the inconvenience of entering the dial text for every session.

1

Open the Bluetooth application on your computer and let it locate the smartphone you paired it with in the previous procedure.

2

Double-click the icon or option representing your smartphone. Your computer connects to your smartphone and shows that DUN services are available.

3

Double-click the

DUN

icon.

4

Enter your wireless service provider’s settings. Contact your wireless service provider if you don’t have these settings.

5

Click

Dial

. Once the connection is successfully established, you can browse the Internet on your computer or download your email.

6

Look for a network connection icon in the taskbar at the bottom of your computer screen to verify that you are connected.

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can check the status of the connection by right-clicking the

Bluetooth network

icon in the taskbar.

NOTE

When a DUN connection is active, you cannot use data services on your smartphone. For example, you cannot browse the Web, or send or receive email messages. Also, any scheduled automatic email retrievals do not take place. You can, however, use other wireless features of your smartphone, such as making and receiving phone calls or sending and receiving text messages.

126 C O N N E C T I N G Y O U R C O M P U T E R T O T H E I N T E R N E T T H R O U G H Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E


5

Terminating a Bluetooth DUN Internet session

It is important to end a Bluetooth DUN session after you finish using it. Ending the

DUN session lets you use the wireless features of your smartphone that require a data connection, it frees up the Bluetooth feature so that you can connect to other

Bluetooth devices, and it optimizes battery life, too.

1

On your computer, right-click the icon or option representing your smartphone.

2

Click

Disconnect.

Connections with

Bluetooth

®

devices

With the built-in Bluetooth wireless technology on your smartphone, you can connect to a number of Bluetooth devices, including a hands-free device such as a headset or car kit, a printer, or a GPS receiver, as well as to other smartphones and handhelds that are equipped with

Bluetooth wireless technology. If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology, you can also synchronize wirelessly or use your phone to connect your computer to the Internet.

You can create a list of Bluetooth devices that you trust to communicate with your smartphone. When communicating with trusted devices, your smartphone skips the discovery process and creates a secure link as long as the device is within range.

Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet depending on environmental conditions, including obstacles, radio interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors.

When you configure a hands-free device, as described previously in Connecting to a

Bluetooth hands-free device, the hands-free device automatically appears in your Trusted Devices list. Follow the steps in this section to add other devices to your

Trusted Devices list, such as a friend’s handheld.

DID YOU KNOW

?

Your smartphone does not support wireless connections to Bluetooth stereo headphones.

C O N N E C T I O N S W I T H B L U E T O O T H

®

D E V I C E S 127

5


Requesting a connection with another

Bluetooth device

1

Press

Applications

and select

Bluetooth

.

2

Select

Bluetooth On

.

5

Select

Trusted Devices

.

3


NOTE

Use the same device name for all your Bluetooth connections. If you change the device name, you need to recreate any partnerships you already created.

4

Select

Setup Devices

.

6

Select

Add Device

. The

Discovery

icon appears, indicating that the discovery process is active.

7

Select the

Show


Nearby devices

.

8

If the device you want to add doesn’t appear on the Discovery Results list, make sure that the other device is ready to receive a connection request (see the device’s documentation), and then select

Find More

on your smartphone to search again.

9

Enter the same passkey on your smartphone and on the Bluetooth device, and select

OK

.

128 C O N N E C T I O N S W I T H B L U E T O O T H

®

D E V I C E S


5

IMPORTANT

Some Bluetooth devices have a preset passkey. If your device has a predefined passkey, you can find it in the documentation for that device. Other devices provide a screen where you enter a passkey that you make up. In either case, you must use the same passkey on both your smartphone and the other Bluetooth device. We recommend that where possible, you make up a passkey of 16 alphanumeric characters (letters and numerals only) to improve the security of your smartphone. The longer the passkey, the more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered.

10

Select

Done

.

2

Select

Bluetooth On

.

3


NOTE

Use the same device name for all your Bluetooth connections. If you change the device name, you need to re-create any partnerships you already created.

Accepting a connection from another

Bluetooth device

1

TIP

For the smartphone to be visible to

Bluetooth devices, the Bluetooth setting must be set to On and visibility must be set to

Visible or Temporary.

Press

Applications

Bluetooth

.

and select

4

Select the

Visibility

pick list and select one of the following:

Visible:

Enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted Devices list to request a connection with your smartphone. Your smartphone remains accessible to other devices until you turn this option off. After you’re done using this setting, remember to change it back to Hidden.

C O N N E C T I O N S W I T H B L U E T O O T H

®

D E V I C E S 129

5


TIP

Use the Visible option only when you need your smartphone to be accessible for an extended period of time. For short term accessibility, use the Temporary option.

Temporary:

Enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted Devices list to request a connection with your smartphone during the next two minutes. Your smartphone reverts to the Hidden setting and becomes inaccessible to other devices after two minutes.

Hidden:

Allows only devices with which you have previously formed a partnership to request a connection with your smartphone. New devices cannot request a connection.

5

Enter the same passkey on your smartphone and on the Bluetooth device.

IMPORTANT

Some Bluetooth devices, such as headsets and GPS receivers, have a preset passkey. If your device has a predefined passkey, you can find it in the documentation for that device. Other devices provide a screen where you enter a passkey that you make up. In either case, you must use the same passkey on both your smartphone and the other Bluetooth device. We recommend that where possible, you make up a passkey of 16 alphanumeric characters (letters and numerals only) to improve the security of your smartphone. The longer the passkey, the more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered.

6

(Optional) Check the

Add to trusted device list

box if you want to form a partnership with the requesting device.

7

Select

OK

.

130 C O N N E C T I O N S W I T H B L U E T O O T H

®

D E V I C E S

Your photos, videos, and music

Do you have a wallet bulging with photos of friends, family, pets, and your most recent vacation?

Are you tired of carrying both your MP3 player and your phone?

Your Palm

®

Treo

™

680 smartphone solves both problems. You can keep your favorite photos right on your smartphone—videos, too.

And there's no need to carry an expensive MP3 player; you can play music on your smartphone. Simply transfer songs onto your smartphone or an expansion card and then listen through your stereo headphones (cards and headphones sold separately).

Benefits

•

Never be far from your favorite people, places, and songs

•

Arrange your photos, videos, and songs

•

No separate photo viewer, MP3,

CD, or mini-disc player required

C H A P T E R

6

In this chapter

Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Pictures & Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Pocket Tunes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C

6

Camera

Your smartphone comes with an easy-to-use, built-in, VGA camera with 2x digital zoom. You can use the camera to take and view pictures and videos and send them to your friends and family. To add a personal touch to your smartphone, use your pictures as your wallpaper for the

Main tab in the Phone application and as caller ID images.

location is based on the location of the album (smartphone or expansion card).

New Albums:

Opens a dialog box where you can enter an album name and select the storage location

(smartphone or expansion card).

Taking a picture

You can store pictures on your smartphone or on an expansion card.

1

Press

Applications

and select

Camera

.

2

By default, the Camera application stores pictures you take in the

PALM

folder on your expansion card (if a card is inserted). Otherwise, Camera stores pictures in the

PALM

album on your smartphone. To store a picture in a different location, select one of the following:

<Album name>:

Stores the picture in the selected album. The storage

TIP

The default camera resolution is VGA (640 x 480) and it also supports QVGA (320 x 240) resolution. To view these settings before you take a picture, press

Menu

.

3

Find your subject in the screen on your smartphone (the lens is on the back of your smartphone).

4

(Optional) To get a close-up of your subject, press

Up

to Press

Down

to return to

1x

.

C A M E R A 133

6


5

Press

Center

to capture the

6

picture.


TIP

To add an audio caption later, open the picture and then select

Audio Caption

from the

Photo

menu.

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can personalize a picture.

Open the

Photo

menu, select

Draw on

, and then use the drawing tools to add your own personal touch. When you save the picture, you can replace the original or save a copy.

Saves the picture in the location you selected in step 2.

Deletes the picture.

Recording a video

You can store videos on your smartphone or on an expansion card.

1

Press

Applications

and select

Camera

.

2

Select

Camcorder

.

Opens a dialog box where you can select how you want to send the picture: Messaging,

Bluetooth, or Email. The receiving device must support the method you select.

Lets you add a voice caption.

TIP

The video recording screen displays the approximate recording time you have left based on the space available on your smartphone or expansion card. Actual recording time may vary depending on how fast you are moving, how many colors you are recording, and so on.

3

By default, the Camera application stores videos you record in the

PALM

folder on your expansion card (if a card is inserted). Otherwise, Camera stores

134 C A M E R A


6 pictures in the

PALM

album on your smartphone. To store a video in a different location, select one of the following:

<Album name>:

Stores the video in the selected album. The storage location is based on the location of the album


New Albums:

Opens a dialog box where you can enter an album name and select the storage location


4

Find your subject in the screen on your smartphone (the lens is on the back of your smartphone).

5

Press

Center

to start recording.

6

After you finish recording, press

Center

again to stop.

7

Select any of the following:

Plays the video, so you can review it.

Saves the video in the location you selected in step 2.

Deletes the video.

TIP

The default camcorder resolution is CIF

(352 x 288) and it also supports QCIF (176 x

144). To view these settings before you capture a video, press

Menu

.

C A M E R A 135

6


Opens a dialog box where you can select how you want to send the video: Messaging, Bluetooth, or Email. The receiving device must support the method you select and video messages.

Opens a dialog box where you can adjust the volume during playback.

TIP

During playback, tap and drag the

progress indicator

bar to jump to a different section of the video. Select

Pause

to pause video playback.

Customizing your Camera settings

You can customize the built-in camera’s settings for your smartphone.

1

Go to Camera View or Camcorder

View .

2

Press

Menu

. If you are in Camera

View, the Photo Settings screen appears. If you are in Camcorder View, the Video Settings screen appears.

3

Set any of the following preferences:

Effects:

Sets the color palette for the current picture or video. You cannot change an item’s palette after you take the picture or video.

Prompt sound:

(Pictures only) Sets the sound that plays before you take the picture.

Shutter sound:

Determines whether a sound plays when you take a picture.

Microphone:

(Videos only) Turns the microphone on and off so that you can record videos with or without sound.

Resolution:

Sets the default size for newly captured pictures or videos.

Date stamp:

(Pictures only) Determines whether the date the picture is taken appears on your pictures.

Review photos/videos:

Determines whether you can review pictures or videos before saving them and how quickly they are automatically saved.

Auto naming:

Assigns a name to a series of pictures to be captured, such as Seattle001, Seattle002, and so on.

136 C A M E R A


6

4

Select

Done

.

Pictures & Videos

Viewing a picture

In addition to viewing the pictures you capture with the built-in camera, you can view pictures captured on many popular digital cameras or downloaded from the

•

•

•

•

Internet. Your smartphone supports the following picture formats:

JPG

TIF

BMP

GIF

1

Press

Applications

and select

Pics&Videos

.

2

Select the album that contains the picture you want to see.

TIP

To view an album from an expansion card, insert the card and select the album from the

Album list. If the items on the card are not grouped into albums, select the card name from the list.

3

Select the picture you want to view.

4

Press

Right Left

to scroll to the next item in the album.

DID YOU KNOW

?

To see the outer edges of a picture that may not be visible, use the stylus to tap and drag the picture in any direction.

P I C T U R E S & V I D E O S 137

6


•

•

5

If the picture has a voice caption, select

to hear it.

6

Tap the picture or press

Center

return to Thumbnail View.

to

•

•

ASF (with MPEG-4 video and

IMA-ADPCM audio)

AVI (with MJPEG video and PCM audio)

•

•

•

TIP

In Thumbnail View, you can group photos or videos to more easily locate them. Select one of the grouping options from the View menu.

Viewing a video

In addition to viewing the videos you capture with the built-in camera, you can view videos captured on many popular digital cameras. Your smartphone supports the following types of video files:

3GP (with H.263 video and AMR audio)

3G2 (with MPEG-4 video and QCELP audio)

MP4 (with MPEG-4/H.264 video and

MP3/AAC/AAC+ audio)

MPG (with MPEG-1 video and MPEG-1 audio)

M4V (with MPEG-4/H.264 video and

MP3/AAC/AAC+ audio)

1

Press

Applications

and select

Pics&Videos

.

2

Select the album that contains the video you want to see.

3

Select the video you want to view.

Playback begins automatically.

4

Hold down

Right Left

to seek within the current video, or press

Right

or

Left

to scroll to the next item in the album.

5

Press

Center

to return to

Thumbnail View.

DID YOU KNOW

?

If you pause video playback and then close the video, the video starts where you left off the next time you play it.

Viewing a slide show

1

Press

Applications

and select

2

Pics&Videos

.

Select the album you want to view.

138 P I C T U R E S & V I D E O S


6

3

Press

Menu

,

Options

, and then select

Auto-hide Toolbar Off

if you want to see the toolbar.

4

Press show.

Space

to start the slide

5

Press

Center

previous view.

to return to the

3

Select the pictures or videos to send, or select

Select All

to send the entire album. (A items.)

+

appears next to selected

DID YOU KNOW

?

You cannot send copyrighted pictures or videos that appear with a Lock icon in Thumbnail View or in the Picture list.

TIP

To set slide show options such as background music and transitions, open the

Options

menu and select

Slideshow

Setting

. Keep in mind that background music overrides audio captions when you’re running a slide show. Background music for a slide show also overrides any music that might be playing using the Pocket Tunes application on your smartphone.

4

Select

Send

.

Sending pictures or videos

You can send pictures or videos to an email address or to other devices that support picture and video messaging.

1

From the Album list, select the album that contains the picture(s) or video(s) you want to send.

2

Select

Send

.

5

Select how you want to send the picture or video:

Bluetooth

, or

Messaging

Email

.

Copying a picture or video

,

You can copy pictures or videos into another album. You can also copy pictures and videos between your smartphone and an expansion card.


6


1

From the Album list, select the album that contains the picture(s) or video(s) you want to copy.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Copy to

from the

Photo

(or

Video

) menu.

4

Select the pictures or videos to copy, or select

Select All

to copy the entire album. (A

+

appears next to selected items.)

5

Select

Copy

.

6

Select the

Copy items to

pick list and select whether you want to copy the selected items to your device or to an expansion card.

+ sign indicates a picture is selected

7

Select the

Into album

pick list and select the album you want to copy the selected items to.

8

Select

Copy

.

TIP

You can also move pictures and videos between albums. Open the

Photo

(or

Video

) menu and select

Move to

. The remaining steps are the same as copying pictures, but use the Move commands instead of the Copy commands.

Organizing pictures and videos

1

2

Open the album you want to organize.

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Album

, and then select

Add to album

or

Remove from album

.

4

Select the pictures or videos to add or remove, or select

Select All

to add or remove the entire album. (A

+

indicates that you want to add the item. An X indicates that you want to remove the item.)

5

Select

Add

or

Remove

.

140 P I C T U R E S & V I D E O S


6

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can also open the Album list from Camera View or Camcorder View by selecting the icon in the lower-left corner.

TIP

Install the Palm

®

Files application from the

Palm Software Installation CD to easily browse and manage files on an expansion card.

TIP

To change the name, add a caption, or view other picture or video information, highlight (or open) the item, open the

Photo

(or

Video

) menu, and select

Details

.

Adding a picture to a contact entry

1

2

Display the picture you want to add to a contact.

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Options

, and then select

Save as Contact

.

4

Select the contact you want to add this picture to.

Saving a picture as wallpaper

You can select a picture to use as wallpaper for the Main tab in the Phone application.

1

Display the picture you want to save as wallpaper.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Options

, and then select

Save as Wallpaper

.

4

When the confirmation message appears, confirm by selecting

Yes

, or decline by selecting

No

.

Rotating a picture

1

Display the picture you want to rotate.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Rotate

from the

Photo

menu.

4

Select the orientation.

Deleting a picture or video

1

Open the album that contains the picture(s) or video(s) you want to delete.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Delete

from the

Photo

(or

Video

) menu.

4

Select the pictures or videos that you want to delete, or select

Select All

to delete the entire album. (An X appears next to selected items.)


6


5

Select

Delete

.

6

Select

Delete

to confirm the deletion.

the

Media

icon. You can refer to the

Palm Desktop Online Help for information about using the Palm Media desktop application.

TIP

You can also highlight a picture or video in

Thumbnail View, and then press

Backspace

to delete the highlighted item.

Pocket Tunes

Viewing pictures and videos on your computer

When you synchronize your smartphone, your pictures and videos are copied to your desktop computer. You can view pictures in

JPEG format and videos in MPEG-4 format

(3G2 file extension). You can email them to friends using your desktop email application.


To view and edit videos you captured on your smartphone on your computer, you must first install

QuickTime from the Palm Software

Installation CD.

You can listen to music through the speaker on the back of your smartphone or through a stereo headset or headphones

(stereo headphone adapter or 2.5mm stereo headphone or headset required, sold separately). To listen to music on your smartphone, you need to convert the music files into MP3 format using

Windows Media Player (Windows computers) or iTunes (Mac computers), and then transfer the music files to your smartphone or an expansion card. After you transfer the music files, you can play them using Pocket Tunes on your smartphone.

On a Windows computer, you can view and edit synchronized pictures and videos in the Palm Media desktop application.

Open Palm

®

Desktop software and click

142 P O C K E T T U N E S


6

TIP

You can upgrade Pocket Tunes to a version that supports more music file formats (such as

WMA); supports subscription music; and includes additional features. For more info, visit www.pocket-tunes.com/palm.

DID YOU KNOW

?

If a call comes in when you’re listening to music, you can take the call and the music pauses automatically. After you finish the call, the music starts again.

5

Click the

Rip Music

tab, click the

Format

pick list, and then select

mp3

.

Click

OK

.

6

Click

Tools

, and then click

Options

.

7

Click the

Devices

tab, select

Palm

Handheld

from the

Devices

list, and then click

Properties

.

Setting up Windows Media Player for

MP3

On a Windows computer, you need to set

Windows Media Player to save your music files in MP3 format in order for the files to be compatible with Pocket Tunes.

1

Connect your smartphone to your computer with the sync cable.

2

Press

Applications

and select

pTunes

.

3

On your computer, open Windows

Media Player, and then click the

full-screen

icon in the upper-right corner to maximize the window.

4

Click

Tools

, and then click

Options

.

Select your smartphone

Click

Properties

8

Click the

Quality

tab, uncheck the

Convert files as required by this handheld (recommended)

box. Click

Apply

.

P O C K E T T U N E S 143

6


Uncheck box

3

Click the

Advanced

button at the top of the window, and then click

Importing

.

4

Click the

Import Using

pop-up menu and select

MP3 Encoder

.

5

Click the

Setting

pop-up menu and select

Good Quality

.

TIP

Mac

If you want greater control over the file size and sound quality of your MP3 files, select

Custom

from the

Setting

pop-up menu.

9

Click

OK

, and then click

OK

again.

You now have set up Windows Media

Player to transfer MP3 files to the Pocket

Tunes application on your smartphone.

Setting up iTunes for MP3

On a Mac, use iTunes (included with OS X) to convert music from a CD to MP3 format.

For more information on using the iTunes software, see the documentation that came with your Mac.

1

On your Mac, open iTunes.

2

Select

Preferences

.

Transferring MP3 files from your computer

If your MP3 files are already on your computer’s hard drive, you just need to transfer them onto your smartphone to listen to them with Pocket Tunes.

If an expansion card is inserted into the smartphone, Windows Media Player copies the MP3 files to the expansion card.

If you don’t have an expansion card inserted, the MP3 files are copied to your smartphone.

IMPORTANT

You must synchronize your smartphone with your computer at least once before you can transfer MP3 files from your computer.



6


On a Mac, you need an expansion card (sold separately) to listen to music on your smartphone. You cannot transfer MP3 files from your Mac directly onto your smartphone.

Mac:

Drag and drop the MP3 files onto the

Send To Handheld

droplet in the

Palm

folder. Select your device name, the file name, and the destination (card).

Click

OK

. Synchronize your smartphone with your computer. Be patient; transferring music to an expansion card can take several minutes.

1

Connect your smartphone to your computer with the USB sync cable.

2


Applications

and select

pTunes

.

3

If you are transferring MP3 files from a

Mac, insert an expansion card into your smartphone. This step is optional for

Windows users.

4


Windows:

Open Windows Media

Player on your computer. Select the

Sync

tab, and then select

Palm

Handheld

from the drop-down list.

Select

Start Sync

. The files are transferred to your smartphone.

NOTE

Do not press the sync button on your cable. Windows Media Player transfers the files, so there’s no need to do anything.

TIP

You can also use a card reader accessory

(sold separately) to transfer MP3 files from your computer to your expansion card. Create a

Music_Audio

folder in the root directory of the card, and store your MP3 files in this folder.

Transferring music from a CD to your smartphone

If your songs are on a CD and you want to listen to them on your smartphone, you need to convert them to MP3 format on your computer before you transfer the files to your smartphone.


6


WINDOWS ONLY

1

On your computer, open Windows

Media Player.

2

Insert the music CD into your computer’s CD drive.

3

Select the

Rip

tab.

4

Select the tracks you want to convert to

MP3.

5

Select

Rip Music

.

6

Transfer the MP3 files to your smartphone as described in Transferring

MP3 files from your computer.

6

Transfer the MP3 files to your smartphone as described in Transferring

MP3 files from your computer.

Listening to music on your smartphone

CAUTION

Protect your hearing. Listening to this device at full volume for a long period of time can damage your hearing.

1

Make sure the

Ringer switch

is set to the

Sound On

position. See Silencing sounds for more information.

2

Press

Applications

and select

pTunes

.

MAC ONLY

1

On your Mac, open iTunes.

2

Insert the music CD into the CD drive on your Mac.

3

Check the boxes next to the tracks you want to convert to MP3.

4

Click the

Import

button in the upper-right corner of the iTunes window.

5

When the songs have been imported, click the

Eject Disk

button in the lower-right corner of the iTunes window.

TIP

You can change the settings on your smartphone so that pressing and holding the

Side

button opens Pocket Tunes. See

Reassigning buttons for details.

3

Use the

5-way

the following icons:

to access any of

Play

: Plays or resumes playback of the current song.

Next song

: Plays the next song.

Previous song

: Plays the previous song.



6

Choose song

songs to choose from.

Pause

:

: Displays a list of

Pauses playback.

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can also press

Space

to pause and resume playback, as well as use the

5-way

to navigate among songs or pause and resume playback.

Pocket Tunes continues playing until it reaches the end of your list or until you select

Pause

. Music continues to play even if you switch to another application or turn off your screen. If you want to stop playing music when you exit Pocket Tunes, open the

Background Prefs

menu and uncheck the

Enable background play


OK

.

NOTE

To adjust the volume during playback, press the

Volume

button on the side of your smartphone.

Progress indicator

Play/Pause Volume

Creating a playlist

If you want to play a group of songs in a particular order, you can create a playlist.

1

Press

Applications

and select

pTunes

.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Actions

, and then select

Manage Playlists

.

4

Select

New

, and then enter a name for the playlist.

Choose song

Previous song

Next song


6


5

Select

Add Song

. Select the songs you want to include on the playlist.

6

Select

Save List

.

TIP

To play songs from a playlist, open

Pocket

Tunes

, select

Choose Songs

, and then select

Playlists

. Select the playlist you want to play, and then select

All

.

3

Select

Actions

, and then select

Manage Playlists

.

4

Highlight a playlist, and then select

Edit

.

5


•

To delete a song from the playlist, select the song and then select

Remove

.

•

To add a song, select

Add Song

, check a song’s box, and then select

Done

.

•

To move a song up or down one slot, select a song and then select

Up

or

Down

.

6

Select

Save List

.

TIP

To delete a playlist, select

Manage

Playlists

from the

Actions

menu, select the playlist, and then select

Delete List

. Select

Yes

to confirm the deletion.

Editing a playlist

1

Press

Applications

select

pTunes

.

2

Press

Menu

.


Your personal information organizer

Say good-bye to paper calendars and throw away those scribbled to-do lists. Your Palm

®

Treo

™

680 smartphone is all you need to organize your personal information and keep it with you wherever you go.

You never lose your information, even if your battery is completely drained. All of your personal info is backed up each time you synchronize, and your info is kept private when you use the security features on your smartphone. Also, you can easily share info with others electronically.

Benefits

•

Track current, future, and past appointments

•

Make to-do lists that get done

•

•

Set reminders for appointments, birthdays, important tasks, and more

Before you call your friend in

London, check the time first

C H A P T E R

7

In this chapter

Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R

7

Calendar

Calendar is a powerful organizer application that helps you manage your schedule. You can view your calendar by day, week, or month, or as an agenda list that combines your Tasks list and email notifications with your appointments. Schedule repeating meetings or a block of vacation time by creating an event that repeats at an interval you specify. Color-code your appointments by category and add notes with helpful information.

DID YOU KNOW

?

If your company uses

Microsoft Exchange Server 2003, you may be able to wirelessly synchronize Calendar events directly with the server. See Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync for information.

Displaying your calendar

Press

Calendar

repeatedly to cycle through the various views:

•

Agenda View:

Shows your daily schedule, the number of unread email messages, and any items on your Tasks

•

• list that are overdue or due today. If there’s room, Agenda View also lists events on future dates.

Day View:

Shows your daily schedule one day at a time.

Week View:

Shows your schedule for an entire week. The time frames are based on the Start Time and End Time settings in Calendar Preferences.

•

Month View:

Shows your schedule for a whole month.

In most Calendar views, you can do the following:

•

•

•

Open the

Options

menu and select

Year View

to view a calendar for an entire year.

Use the

5-way

to go to another day, week, month, or year—based on the current view. (Not available in

Agenda View.)

Select

Go To

, and then select a date from the calendar. (Not available in

Agenda View.)

C A L E N D A R 151

7


Creating an event

TIP

If you have several appointments to enter, it’s more efficient to use Palm

®

Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook on your computer and then synchronize your smartphone with your computer. For more information, see Synchronizing information— the basics.

Press

1

2

day

Calendar

appears.

Select date

Select

Go To

desired day.

Selected

Selected

New

.

until Day View

and then select the

3

Using the keyboard, enter a starting hour and minute for the event, such as

545 for 5:45.

4

Select the

End Time

box and enter the ending hour and minute for the event.

5

To assign a time zone to the event, select the

Time Zone

pick list and select a city in the time zone you want.

6

Select

OK

.

7

Enter a description for the event.

0

IMPORTANT

If you use Palm Desktop software, do not add time zones to your events. Palm Desktop does not support time zones.

If you use Microsoft Outlook, you can use the time zone feature, but you must install the conduit that came with your smartphone (or a subsequent update) on all the computers with which you sync your smartphone. Chapura PocketMirror and other earlier Microsoft Outlook conduits do not support time zones.

152 C A L E N D A R


7

4

Select

OK

.

TIP

To automatically assign a time zone to your events, open the

Options

menu, select

Preferences

, and check the

New events use time zones

box. All your new events will be assigned to your local time zone (existing events aren’t affected), and you can change the time zone setting for individual events.

TIP

If you want your events with time zones to stay at the same time in Calendar, regardless of the time zone you are in, go to Date & Time

Preferences, select the

Automatically set

pick list, and select

Date and time

. If you select

Date, time and time zone

, the event time shifts if you travel to a different time zone. See Setting the date and time for information.

Type of time units

Number of time units

DID YOU KNOW

?

When an alarm occurs, the

Alert dialog box displays all your pending alerts. Select an alert description to jump to that item, or check the box to clear that alert.

Adding an alarm to an event

1

2

In Calendar, select the event.

Select

Details

.

3

Check the

Alarm

box and select the number of minutes, hours, or days before the event you would like to receive the alarm.

TIP

The alarm for untimed events is defined by minutes, days, or hours before midnight of the date of the event.

Creating an untimed event

An untimed event, such as a holiday or deadline, does not occur at a particular time.

Press

Calendar

until you are in Day

View.

5

Press

Left Right

to go to the date of the event.

6

Make sure no times are highlighted.

C A L E N D A R 153

7


7

Enter a description for the event.

A diamond appears next to the description of an untimed event.

select

Other

to define a custom interval.

4

Select

OK

.

Scheduling a repeating event

TIP

To enter a birthday or anniversary, add this info to the person’s Contacts entry and it automatically appears in your Calendar.

TIP

To enter a holiday, create an untimed event. Then, from the Details screen, select

Every year

as the repeat interval.

1

Create an event, and then select it.

2

Select

Details

.

3

Select the

Repeat

pick list, and then select a repeat interval. If the interval you need doesn’t appear on the list,

This icon indicates a repeating event

DID YOU KNOW

?

If you sync with Microsoft

Outlook and your events include other people, a With field appears in the Details dialog box and your attendee info appears in this field after you sync.

154 C A L E N D A R


7

Color-coding your schedule

Use color-coding to quickly spot various types of events. For example, make appointments with family green, coworkers blue, and friends red. Follow these steps to create a category and assign it a color code.

1

In Day View, select an event description or select an empty time slot.

2

Select

Details

.

3

Select the

Category


Edit Categories

.

4


•

To create a new category, select

New

and then enter a category name.

•

To add a color to an existing category, select a category and select

Edit

.

5

Select the color you want to give this category, and then select

OK

.

6

(Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add or edit more categories.

7

Select

OK

two more times.

Now that the categories are set up with colors, you can assign categories to your events to color-code them. See the next section for details.

Changing or deleting an event

1

Select the event you want to edit or delete.

2

Select

Details

.

3

In addition to the settings covered earlier in this chapter, you can also change any of the following settings:

Date and Time:

Displays when the event takes place. Change these settings to reschedule the event.

Location:

Provides a description of where the event takes place.

Category:

Sets the color-coded category for this event.

Note :

Provides space for you to enter additional text.

Delete:

Removes the event from your calendar.

4

Select

OK

.

TIP

To save memory, you can purge your old events. Open the

Record

menu and select

Purge

. Select the

Delete events older than

pick list and select a time frame. Select

OK

.

C A L E N D A R 155

7


Customizing display options for your calendar

1

Press

Menu

.

2

Select

Options

, and then select

Display Options

.

3

Select the

Default View

pick list and select the view you want to see when you open Calendar.

4

Select

Agenda

and set any of the following options:

Show Due Tasks:

The tasks that are due today and the tasks that are overdue appear in Agenda View.

Show Messages:

The number of read and unread email messages displays in

Agenda View.

Background:

A favorite photo becomes the Agenda View background. Check the

Background

box, select the image placeholder, and then select a photo.

Adjust the fade setting so that the text is easy to read against the photo.

5

Select

Day


Show Category List:

The Category pick list appears in Day View.

Show Time Bars:

The time bars appear in Day View to show the duration of an event and to illustrate event conflicts.

Compress Day View:

When this box is unchecked, all time slots appear on the screen. When this box is checked, start and end times appear for each event, but blank time slots near the bottom of the screen disappear to minimize scrolling.

Show Category Column:

The color-coded category marker appears between the time and the description to

156 C A L E N D A R

indicate under which category the event is filed.


7

7

Select

OK

.s

6

Select

Month


Show Category List:

The Category pick list appears in Month View.

Timed Events:

The events that are scheduled for a specific time appear in

Month View.

Untimed Events:

The events that are scheduled for a specific date but not a specific time appear in Month View.

Daily Repeating Events:

The events that repeat every day appear in Month

View.

TIP

You can customize your smartphone to display the most current Calendar event in the

Main tab in the Phone application. Press

Phone

, open the

Options


Phone Display Options

. Check the

Show Calendar event

box.

Selecting alarm tones

1

Press

Menu

.

2

Select

Options

, and then select

Sound

Preferences

.

3

Select the

Application


Calendar

.

4

Select the

Volume


C A L E N D A R 157

7


5

Select the

Vibrate

pick list and select when you want your smartphone to vibrate for an event alarm.

6

Select

tones

from any of the following pick lists:

Alarm Sound:

The tone that plays the first time your alarm goes off.

Reminder Sound:

The tone that plays if an alarm is not acknowledged and the alarm repeats itself.

Repeat:

The number of times the alarm repeats itself if the alarm is not acknowledged.

Default Alarm:

A default amount of time before the event for which the alarm goes off.

TIP

You can also record sounds and use them as alarms. Select

Manage

on the Sound &

Alerts Preferences screen.

•

•

To record a sound, select

New

.

To play a sound, select it and press

Center

on the 5-way.

•

•

To delete a sound, select it and press

Backspace

.

To send a sound, select it and then select

Send

.

DID YOU KNOW

?

Your smartphone includes a silent alarm that can vibrate even when the

Ringer switch is set to Sound Off.

World Clock

World Clock displays the day and time in three cities anywhere around the globe.

Whether you’re traveling or staying home, it’s easy to keep track of the best time to reach your business associates, friends, and family in faraway places.

7

Select

Done

.

158 W O R L D C L O C K


7

Selecting cities

World Clock shows the system date and time above the world map. If you selected the option to get the date and time from the mobile network (see Setting the date and time), your wireless service provider network automatically updates the time display to match the local time when you travel.

TIP

If you did not select the option to get the date and time from the mobile network, then you can set the city at the top of the screen to a fixed location.

Below the world map, you can view the time in two other cities. If you travel a lot you may want to select your home city as one of these two cities, so that you always know what time it is at home.

1

Press

Applications

select

World Clock

.

2

Select a

City

pick list, and select a city in the same time zone.

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can run your stylus over the map to see the time in other cities. The shadow over the map represents nighttime moving across the globe.

TIP

World Clock does not automatically update the system time for daylight savings time. To change the Daylight Savings Time setting, see

Setting the date and time.

Adding cities

If the city you want to display is not in the predefined list, you can add it.

1

Select a

City


Edit

List

.

2

Select

Add

.

3

Select a location in the same time zone as the city you want to add, and then select

OK

.

W O R L D C L O C K 159

7


160 T A S K S

4

Enter the name of the city.

5

Select

Location

, select

Map

, select the location of the city, and then select

OK

.

6

If the city is not on Daylight Savings

Time, uncheck this box. If Daylight

Savings Time is observed, enter

Start

and

End

dates.

7

Select

OK

, and then select

Done

.

Setting an alarm

The next time you travel, don’t rely on a hotel alarm clock to get you to that important meeting. Use your smartphone instead. World Clock includes a built-in alarm feature that you can use as a travel alarm.

1

Select

Off

in the upper-right corner.

2

Select the time you want the alarm to sound.

3

Select

OK

.

You can use Tasks to remind you of tasks you need to complete and to keep a record of when you finish tasks.

Adding a task

1

Press

Applications

and select

Tasks

.

2

Select

New

to create a new task.

3

Tasks

Enter a description of the task. The text can be longer than one line.

TIP

To customize the alarm sound and volume, open the

Options

menu and select

Alarm

Preferences

.

TIP

Make sure the

Ringer switch

is set to

Sound On

, so that you can hear the alarm.

Setting task priority, due date, and other details

The Details dialog box enables you to assign a priority level, due date, category, privacy flag, and other details for each task.


7

1

2

3

Select the task to which you want to assign details.

Select

Details

.

Set any of the following:

Priority:

Select the priority number for this task (1 is most important). Later you can arrange your tasks based on the importance of each task.

repeating task, the next instance of this task automatically appears in your task list.

Private:

Check this box to mark this task private. See Working with private entries for additional information.

:

Select this button to enter additional text that you want to associate with the task.

TIP

You can also select the priority from the

Tasks list by selecting the number next to a task and then selecting a priority level.

Category:

Assign the task to a specific category.

Due Date:

Select the

Due Date

pick list and select a due date for the task.

4

Select

OK

.

TIP

If you turn on the Show Due Dates option in the Tasks Preferences screen, you can select the due date in the Tasks list to set a new date.

TIP

Press

Menu

to access other features such as importing phone numbers into the Tasks list.

Alarm:

Set an alarm for this task.

Repeat:

Indicate whether the task occurs at regular intervals and how often it repeats. When you check off a

Checking off a task

1

Select the task you want to check off.

2

Press

Center

or tap in the box to check off the task.

T A S K S 161

7


TIP

If you accidentally check off a task and need to uncheck it, highlight the task again and press

Center

on the 5-way to uncheck it.

TIP

You can set Tasks to record the date that you completed a task, and you can select to show or hide completed tasks. Completed tasks remain in the memory of your smartphone until you purge them.

DID YOU KNOW

?

Overdue tasks have an exclamation point (!) next to the due date.

Organizing your tasks

In the Tasks list, select one of these options:

All:

Displays all your tasks.

Date:

Displays tasks that are due in a specific time frame. With

Date

selected, press

Down

to select the pick list, and then press

Center

to see the various options:

Due Today

,

Last 7 Days

,

Next 7

Days

, or

Past Due

.

Category:

Displays tasks that are assigned to the selected category. Select the

Category

pick list to select a different category.

162 T A S K S


7

Deleting a task

1

2

4

Select the task you want to delete.

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Delete Task

from the

Record

menu.

Select

OK

.

TIP

To save memory, you can purge all completed tasks. Open the

Record

menu and select

Purge

. Select

OK

.

Customizing Tasks

The Tasks Preferences screen enables you to control the appearance of the Tasks list screen.

1

In the Tasks list screen, press

Menu

.

2

Select

Options

, and then select

Preferences

.

3


Sort by:

Indicates the order in which your tasks appear in the list.

Show Completed Tasks:

Displays tasks you’ve checked off.

Record Completion Date:

Replaces due date with the completion date when you complete (check off) the task.

Show Due Dates:

Displays task due dates and inserts an exclamation point

(!) next to overdue tasks.

Show Priorities:

Displays the priority setting for each task.

Show Categories:

Displays the category for each task.

Alarm Sound:

Sets the sound for the alarms you assign to your tasks.

4

Select

OK

.

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can display your tasks in your calendar. See Customizing display options for your calendar for details.

T A S K S 163

7


164 T A S K S

Your memos and documents

With its ability to store large amounts of important information, your

Palm

®

Treo

™

680 smartphone lets you take your office with you— including your Microsoft Office and PDF files. You can keep updated copies of the files on both your smartphone and your computer so that you can work on them in the most convenient location any time.

Leave your note pad and voice recorder at home. Use Memos to type notes. Use Voice Memo to record notes, agenda items, and other important thoughts, and play them back, right on your smartphone. You can even send your notes and voice memos to a friend or colleague by attaching them to an email or multimedia message.

Benefits

•

Manage Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and PDF files on your smartphone

•

Improve productivity by taking important docs, spreadsheets, and presentations with you

•

Capture thoughts on the fly

C H A P T E R

8

In this chapter

Documents To Go Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Memos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Voice Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S

8

Documents To Go

Professional

www.dataviz.com/office2007 (additional fees may apply).

NOTE

The Palm Software Installation CD includes the Documents To Go

®

desktop software. On your smartphone, the companion for Documents To Go is named

Documents and it’s already installed on your smartphone.

With the Documents application, you can take your important office info with you.

You can carry, create, view, and edit

Microsoft Word and Excel files directly on your smartphone. You can also view, carry, and manage PowerPoint and PDF files. For example, you can open email attachments, files you download with the web browser, and files stored on an expansion card—as long as the files are in a supported format.

NOTE

The version of Documents To Go that comes with your smartphone does not support Microsoft Office 2007. To access

Office 2007 files on your smartphone, you must save the files in Office 2003 format.

For information about an upgrade that supports Office 2007, go to

If you install the Documents To Go desktop software (from the Palm Software

Installation CD), you can use Documents

To Go to transfer files from your computer to your smartphone when you synchronize.

Here are a few more examples of what you can do with Documents:

•

•

•

•

Send and receive email attachments in

Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Acrobat file formats (DOC, XLS, PPT, and PDF).

View Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and

Acrobat files (DOC, XLS, PPT, and PDF).

Create or edit a Word-compatible document or Excel-compatible spreadsheet on your smartphone, and then save it in the native DOC or XLS format.

Create a PowerPoint presentation on your computer, use the Documents To

Go desktop application to optimize the file for your smartphone, and then sync the file onto your smartphone to view it on the go.

D O C U M E N T S T O G O P R O F E S S I O N A L 167

8


NOTE

The Documents application does not support some editing functions, such as multiple font sizes and spell checking.

TIP

For more info on the Documents To Go application on your smartphone, go to www.dataviz.com

. If you installed the desktop application from the Palm Software

Installation CD, you can also click the

Documents To Go

icon on your computer, and then click

Help

.

TIP

Install the

Files

application from the Palm

Software Installation CD to easily browse and manage files on an expansion card.

2

Select the document you want from the list.

TIP

When you work on a file on your smartphone, you can save it to your smartphone or an expansion card. Open the

File

menu, select

Save As

, and then select the location where you want to save the file.

Opening a document

In the Documents application, you can view and open any Word, Excel,

PowerPoint, or Acrobat (PDF) file on your smartphone or an expansion card that is inserted in the expansion slot.

1

Press

Applications

and select

Documents

.

Memos

Memos are a great way to store notes on your smartphone.

DID YOU KNOW

?

Each memo can include 4,096 characters of text.

168 M E M O S


8

Creating a memo

1

Press

Applications

and select

Memos

.

2

Enter the text you want to appear in the memo.

3

Select

Done

.

Voice Memo

Voice Memo provides a place for you to record and play back notes and other important thoughts directly on your smartphone.

TIP

You can assign categories to your memos.

Open the memo you want to change, select the

category

pick list at the top of the screen, and select a category.

Creating a voice memo

When recording a voice memo, hold your smartphone with the screen facing towards you while speaking.

1

Press and hold the

Side

button on your smartphone while recording your memo. After you finish recording, release the

Side

button.

The memo is automatically saved to your smartphone.

2

(Optional) Enter a title for the memo.

Deleting a memo

1

Open the memo you want to delete.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Delete Memo

from the

Record

menu.

4

Select

OK

.

V O I C E M E M O 169

8


TIP

You can also access Voice Memo, by pressing

Applications

and selecting

Voice

Memo

.

TIP

If you need to pause while recording, press and hold

Center

on the 5-way. Release the button to resume recording.

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can use a voice memo as a ringtone. Highlight the voice memo in the list, open the

Voice Memo


Copy to Ringtone

.

Listening to a voice memo

1

Press

Applications

and select

Voice Memo

.

2

In the Voice Memo list, navigate to the voice memo title and then press

Center

to select it. The voice memo begins to play.

3

Press

Center

playback.

to pause or stop

TIP

To adjust the volume level, press the

Volume

button on the side of your smartphone.

TIP

To change a voice memo title, open the

Voice Memo

menu and select

Rename

Memo

.

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can send a voice memo in an email or MMS message (see the documentation for your email application, or

Creating and sending a multimedia message).

You can also use Bluetooth

®

wireless technology to send a voice memo to a nearby

Bluetooth device (see Sending info over a

Bluetooth wireless connection).

170 V O I C E M E M O

Your application and info management tools

Synchronization is a great way to transfer, update, and back up info on your Palm

®

Treo

™

680 smartphone. Synchronizing simply means that info you entered or updated in one place

(your smartphone or your computer) is automatically updated in the other. There’s no need to enter info twice.

Expansion cards (sold separately) provide a compact and limitless storage solution. When one card becomes full, simply use another card to carry your extra music and video clips and to install and run games and other software, from dictionaries to travel guides.

Benefits

•

Locate info in your applications with the Find feature

•

Install applications, games, and other software

•

•

Quickly enter, update, and protect your info on your computer and your smartphone

Store, carry, and exchange info

C H A P T E R

9

In this chapter

Using Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Viewing and using the alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Viewing application info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179


®

wireless technology . . . . . . . 180

Beaming information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Synchronizing information—advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Using expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S

9

Using Find

The Find feature locates any text in the built-in applications and databases and in some third-party applications. The Find feature searches for the group of characters you specify, including characters that are part of a word. Find is not case-sensitive.

DID YOU KNOW

?

Find locates any word that begins with the text you enter. For example, entering “plane” finds “planet,” but not

“airplane.”

Viewing and using the alerts

1

Press

Option

, and then press

Shift/

Find

to open the Find dialog box.

2

Enter the text you want to find.

3

Select

OK

to start the search.

4

In the search results, select the text you want to review, or select

Find More

to continue the search.

The Alert dialog box on your smartphone shows info about incoming items, such as new email messages and Calendar events.

An alert also notifies you when you miss a phone call.

To view the Alert dialog box, tap the blinking bell with your stylus when it appears in the upper-left corner of any screen, or press and hold

Center

when the blinking bell appears.

U S I N G F I N D 173

9


In the Alert dialog box, you can do any of the following:

•

•

•

•

Check the box next to the alert to remove it from the list.

Select the alert to open the corresponding application and view the alert item (message, event, missed call, and so on).

Select

Done

to close the Alert dialog box. The alert remains active and the bell continues to blink in the upper-left corner of the screen.

Select

Clear All

to delete all alerts in the Alert dialog box.

3

Select

Options

, and then select

Advanced Mode

or

Basic Mode

.

Calculator

Calculator includes a basic calculator, plus an advanced calculator with scientific, financial, and conversion functions.

Switching between Basic and Advanced

Calculator Modes

1

Press

Applications

and select

Calc

.

2

Press

Menu

.

TIP

In Basic Mode, you can also press

Right

on the 5-way to switch to Advanced Mode. In

Advanced Mode, press

Right

on the 5-way to cycle between functions, and press

Left

on the 5-way to return to Basic Mode.

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can tap the onscreen number pad or use the keyboard to input numbers.

174 C A L C U L A T O R


9

Selecting functions in Advanced

Calculator Mode

1

Switch to

Advanced Mode

(see the preceding procedure).

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Options

, and then select the type of function you want to use:

Math:

Advanced mathematical functions such as exponents, roots, and logarithms.

Trig:

Trigonometric functions such as sine, cosine, tangent, and variants.

Finance:

Financial calculator functions such as APR and amortization.

Logic:

Hexadecimal characters in keypad, plus logic functions such as

And, Not, Or, and Xor.

Statistics:

Statistical functions such as sum, factorial, and random number generator.

Weight/Tmp:

Weight and temperature conversions for metric and English values.

Length:

Length conversions for metric and English values.

Area:

Area conversions for metric, traditional, and English values.

Volume:

Volume conversions for metric and English values.

4

Press

Menu

.

5

Select

Pref

, and then select the decimal display format:

Float

,

Fixed(x)

,

Sci(x)

, or

Eng(x)

.

6

Press

Menu

.

7

Select

Pref

, and then select the number display format:

Degrees

,

Radians

, or

Grads

.

TIP

Select

Sto

to store a number in one of ten memory slots. Select

Rcl

to recall a stored number.

TIP

Select

Con

to access a list of mathematical constants such as Avogadro’s number or the speed of light.

C A L C U L A T O R 175

9


Installing applications

Your smartphone comes with several built-in and ready-to-use applications. You can also install additional applications, such as business software, games, and more.

The Palm Software Installation CD includes several bonus software apps, and you can purchase other third-party Palm OS

®

apps as well. To learn about applications you can add to your smartphone, go to www.palm.com/treo680gsm.

NOTE

The instructions in this section tell you how to install basic PRC (Palm OS application) and PDB (Palm OS database) files on your smartphone. Some Palm OS software uses an installer or wizard to guide you through the process. For details, consult the documentation that came with the software.

Installing bonus software from the CD

The Palm Software Installation CD includes several bonus software applications that you can install on your smartphone. You can install these applications when you install the desktop software, or you can install them later.

1

Insert the Palm Software Installation CD

2

3

6

into the CD drive on your computer.

Click

Install bonus software

.

Click the name of the application you want to install.

4

Click

Install

(on the right side of the screen).

5

Repeat steps 3 and 4 to install additional applications.

Synchronize your smartphone with your computer to install the application(s) on your smartphone.

Installing applications from the Internet

You can use the web browser on your smartphone to install Palm OS files (PRC or

PDB) directly from the Internet. When you download a PRC or PDB file, it is automatically installed on your smartphone. If a file is compressed (for example, as a ZIP or SIT file), you need to download it to your computer, expand the file, and then synchronize to transfer the expanded file to your smartphone.

176 I N S T A L L I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S


9

1

Open the web browser (see Viewing a web page).

2

Go to the page that contains the link to the application you want to download.

3

Press

Left Right

to highlight the link to the file, and then press

Center

to initiate the download process.

4

Follow the onscreen instructions to accept and install the application.

1 Windows:

Drag and drop the file(s) onto the

Palm Quick Install

icon on the

Windows desktop.

Mac:

Drag and drop the file(s) onto the

Send To Handheld

droplet in the

Palm

folder.

Installing applications from a computer

When you download an application to your computer, it is probably in a compressed format such as a ZIP or SIT file. If the file is compressed, you need to use a decompression utility on your computer, such as WinZip or Allume Stuffit Expander, before you install the application on your smartphone.


To install an app from your computer to your smartphone, you must first install Palm

®

Desktop software on your computer (see Installing the desktop synchronization software).

2

Select your device name from the

User

list, and then click

OK

.

3

Synchronize your smartphone with your computer to install the application(s) on your smartphone.

I N S T A L L I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S 177

9


TIP

Want to install an app to an expansion card rather than your smartphone?

Windows:

Open Palm

®

Quick Install and drag the file to the

Expansion Card

pane.

Mac:

In the menu for Palm Desktop software, click

HotSync

, select

Install Handheld files

, and select

expansion card

as the file’s destination.

TIP

On a Windows computer, you can also access Palm Quick Install by selecting the

Quick Install

icon in Palm Desktop software or from the

Programs

folder in the

Start

menu.

Getting help with third-party applications

If you encounter a problem (such as an error message) with a third-party application, contact the application’s author or vendor. For general troubleshooting of third-party applications, see Third-party applications.

Removing applications

If you decide that you no longer need an application, or you want to free up memory, you can remove apps from your smartphone or an expansion card (for more on expansion cards, see Inserting an expansion card). You can remove only apps, patches, and extensions that you install; you cannot remove the built-in apps that reside in the ROM portion of your smartphone. Applications that you cannot remove appear with a Lock icon next to them.

DID YOU KNOW

?

Applications deleted from your smartphone are kept on your computer in the

Archive folder of your user folder. If you have trouble locating your user folder, see I can’t find my user folder.

1

Press

Applications

.

2

If you want to remove an application from an expansion card, insert the card into your smartphone.

178 R E M O V I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S


9

3

Press

Menu

.

4

Select

Delete

on the

App

menu.

5

Select the

Delete From

pick list and select the location of the application you want to remove:

Phone

or

<card name>

.

6

Select the application that you want to remove.

7

Select

Delete

.

8

Synchronize to remove the application from the Backup subfolder on your computer.

If you upgraded from a previous version of Palm Desktop, your Backup subfolder may be located in the palmOne or

Handspring folder.

2

If you find a PRC or PDB file for the application you just removed, delete the file from the Backup subfolder.

3

Delete the file from your device again.

Viewing application info

Manually deleting applications

If an app you delete reappears on your smartphone, you may need to manually delete the app from your computer.

1

Locate your

Backup

subfolder on your computer.

Windows: C:\Program

Files\Palm\<device name>.

Mac: Mac

HD\Applications\Palm\Users\<device name>.

The Info screens display basic statistics about the applications on your smartphone.

1

Press

Applications

.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Info

on the

App

menu.

4

Select the

Device

pick list and select the location of the app you want to view info for:

Phone

or

<card name>

.

V I E W I N G A P P L I C A T I O N I N F O 179

9


5

At the bottom of the screen, select the type of information you want to view:


®

wireless technology

Version:

The version numbers of applications on your smartphone.

Size:

The size (in kilobytes) of applications and information on your smartphone.

Records:

The number of entries in various applications on your smartphone.

6

Scroll to the application you want to see info about.

7

Select

Done

.

The range of Bluetooth

®

wireless technology is up to 30 feet in optimum environmental conditions. Performance and range may be affected by physical obstacles, radio interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors.

TIP

Check your battery level before establishing a Bluetooth wireless connection.

If the battery level is very low, you can’t make a Bluetooth wireless connection.

Sending info over a Bluetooth wireless connection

In most applications, you can send an individual entry or item such as a contact or a picture. You can also send all the entries in a category, such as all contacts in the

Business category.

1

Press

Applications

and select

Bluetooth

.

180 S E N D I N G I N F O R M A T I O N W I T H B L U E T O O T H

®

W I R E L E S S T E C H N O L O G Y


9

2

Select

Bluetooth On

.

3

Open an application.

4

Select the entry or category you want to send. You cannot send an item that has a lock next to it.

5

Press

Menu

.

6

Select

Send

from the leftmost menu.

7

Select

Bluetooth

, and then select

OK

.

8

Select the receiving device(s) from the

Discovery Results list, and then select

OK

.

9

Wait for a message to indicate that the transfer is complete before you continue using your smartphone.

7

8

9

10

Select the application you want to transfer. You cannot send an item that has a lock

Select

Select

Send

.

next to it.

Bluetooth

, and then select

OK

.

Select the receiving device(s) from the

Discovery Results list, and then select

OK

.

11

Wait for a message to indicate that the transfer is complete before you continue using your smartphone.

Sending an app over a Bluetooth wireless connection

1

Press

Applications

select

Bluetooth

.

2

Select

Bluetooth On

.

3

Press

Applications

.

4

Press

Menu

.

5

Select

Send

from the

App

menu.

6

Select the

Send From

pick list and select the location of the app you want to send:

Phone

or

<card name>

.

Receiving info over a Bluetooth wireless connection

1

Press

Applications

and select

Bluetooth

.

2

Select

Bluetooth On

.

3

Select the

Visibility

pick list and select one of the following:

Visible:

Enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted Devices list to request a connection with your smartphone. Your smartphone remains accessible to other devices until you turn this option off. After you’re done using this setting, remember to change it back to Hidden.

S E N D I N G I N F O R M A T I O N W I T H B L U E T O O T H

®

W I R E L E S S T E C H N O L O G Y 181

9


Temporary:

Enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted Devices list to request a connection with your smartphone during the next two minutes. Your smartphone reverts to the Hidden setting and becomes inaccessible to other devices after two minutes.

4

Use the other device to discover your smartphone and send information to it:

•

See the other device’s documentation to learn how to discover and send information over a Bluetooth wireless connection.

•

If the Ringer switch is set to Sound

On, your smartphone beeps to notify you of the connection and then prompts you to accept the info. Select a category or expansion card to file the item(s). If you don’t select a category, the item(s) goes into the

Unfiled category.

5

Select

Yes

to receive the information or

No

to refuse it.

TIP

The Device Name in the Bluetooth app is the name other devices with Bluetooth wireless technology see when they connect to your smartphone. The default name is the name you gave your device during setup. You can change this name if you want to.

DID YOU KNOW

?

When you receive an application over a Bluetooth connection, you can store the application on your smartphone or send it to an expansion card inserted into the expansion card slot.

Beaming information

Your smartphone is equipped with an IR

(infrared) port so that you can beam information to another device with an IR port—provided the other device supports

IR communications with Palm OS devices.

The IR port is located on the top of your smartphone, next to the Ringer switch, behind the small dark shield.

182 B E A M I N G I N F O R M A T I O N


9

TIP

For best results, the path between the two devices must be clear of obstacles, and both devices must be stationary. If you have difficulty beaming, shorten the distance and avoid bright sunlight.

Beam Category:

Sends all entries in the current category.

DID YOU KNOW

?

If you beam a bookmark or saved page from the web browser, it beams the URL, not the contents of that page.

Beaming an entry

You can beam an individual entry or item such as a contact or a picture. You can also beam all the entries in the selected category, such as all the contacts in the

Business or Family category.

TIP

Beam your business card in two key presses: From the Main tab in the Phone application, press

Menu

, and then press

M

.

5

When the Beam Status dialog box appears, point the IR port on your smartphone directly at the IR port of the receiving device.

6

Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is complete before you continue using your smartphone.

1

Open the application that holds the entry you want to beam.

2

Select the entry or category you want to beam. You cannot beam an item that has a lock next to it.

3

Press

Menu

.

4

Select

Record


Beam:

Sends an individual record.

B E A M I N G I N F O R M A T I O N 183

9


Beaming an application

Not all applications can be beamed. A lock

icon appears on the Beam screen next to applications that cannot be beamed.

1

Press

Applications

.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Beam

from the

App

menu.

4

Select the

Beam From

pick list and select the location of the application you want to beam:

Phone

or

<card name>

.

5

Select the application you want to transfer.

6

Select

Beam

.

7

When the Beam Status dialog box appears, point the IR port on your smartphone directly at the IR port of the receiving device.

8

Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is complete before you continue using your smartphone.

Receiving beamed information


Make sure that the

Beam Receive

option in Power

Preferences is set to

On

. See Optimizing power settings for details.

1

Turn on your screen.

2

Select the beam command on the transmitting device.

3

Point the IR port on your smartphone directly at the IR port of the transmitting device to open the Beam Status dialog box.

4

When the Beam Status dialog box appears, select a category for the entry.

5

Select

Yes

to receive the information or

No

to refuse it.

184 B E A M I N G I N F O R M A T I O N


9

TIP

If you do not select a category upon receiving a beamed item, the item is placed in the Unfiled category.

TIP

If you can’t receive beamed info, make sure that you are not running a third-party app that disables beaming. If you still can’t receive a beam, try a soft reset (see Resetting your smartphone).

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can store a beamed app on your smartphone or send it to an expansion card inserted into the expansion card slot.

change which applications synchronize. For example, if you don’t use the Memos application and you want to speed up synchronization, you can turn off synchronization for Memos.

TIP

Windows

If you set up your smartphone to sync with Outlook, you can learn how to change which applications synchronize, by doing the following: Click the

HotSync manager

icon in the taskbar and select

Custom

. Select a conduit that syncs with

Outlook, click

Change

, and then click

Help

.

Synchronizing information— advanced

NOTE

If your computer is running

Windows Vista, visit www.palm.com/ windowsvista for more information.

Changing which applications sync

By default, information from Calendar,

Contacts, Memos, Pictures & Videos, and

Tasks is updated each time you synchronize your smartphone. You can

WINDOWS ONLY

1

Click

HotSync

®

manager

in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your screen.

2

Select

Custom

.

3

Select your device name from the

User

list at the top of the screen.

4

Select the application for which you want to turn synchronization on or off, and then click

Change

.

5

Select

Synchronize the files

to turn on synchronization for an app.

S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D 185

9


Select

Do nothing

to turn off synchronization for an app that currently synchronizes (for example, to turn off synchronization for Memos if you do not use this app).

6

(Optional) If you want to make this change permanent, check the

Set as default

box. Otherwise, your change affects only one synchronization (the next one you do); thereafter, the synchronization action reverts to what it was before the change.

7

Click

OK

.

8

(Optional) To turn synchronization on or off for other apps, repeat steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 for each application you want to change.

9

Click

Done

.

NOTE

If you want the information in one location (smartphone or computer) to completely replace the information in the other location for that app, select one of the two overwrite options. For example, if the Calendar info on your smartphone is accurate but the info on your computer has become corrupted, select

Handheld overwrites Desktop

for the Calendar app to have your smartphone info replace your computer info. Note that “handheld” refers to your smartphone and “desktop” refers to your computer.

MAC ONLY

1

Double-click the

Palm Desktop

icon in the

Palm

folder.

2

From the

HotSync

menu, select

Conduit Settings

.

3

From the

User

pop-up menu, select your device name.

4

Select the application for which you want to turn synchronization on or off, and then click

Conduit Settings

.

5

Select


to turn on synchronization for an app.

186 S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D


9

Select

Do nothing

to turn off synchronization for an app that currently synchronizes (for example, to turn off synchronization for Memos if you do not use this app).

6

(Optional) If you want to make this change permanent, click

Make Default

.

Otherwise, your change affects only one synchronization (the next one you do); thereafter, the synchronization action reverts to what it was before the change.

7

Click

OK

.

8

(Optional) To turn synchronization on or off for other apps, repeat steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 for each application you want to change.

9

Close the Conduit Settings window.

NOTE

If you want the information in one location (smartphone or computer) to completely replace the information in the other location for that app, select one of the two overwrite options. For example, if the Calendar info on your smartphone is accurate but the info on your Mac has become corrupted, select

Handheld overwrites Macintosh

for the Calendar app to have your smartphone info replace the info on your Mac. Note that

“handheld” refers to your smartphone.

Setting up a Bluetooth connection for synchronization

If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology, you can synchronize wirelessly over a Bluetooth connection.

1

Press

Applications

and select

Bluetooth

.

2

Select

Bluetooth On

.


9


5

Select

Setup Devices

.

6

Select

HotSync Setup

.

3


NOTE

Use the same device name for all your Bluetooth connections. If you change the device name, you need to re-create any partnerships you have already created.

4

Select the

Visible

or

Visibility


Temporary

.

TIP

After you form a partnership with a device, you can change the

Visibility

setting back to

Hidden

. That way only devices with which you’ve already formed a partnership can find your smartphone. New devices cannot request a connection.

7

Follow the onscreen instructions to create a partnership between your smartphone and your computer.

In some cases you may need to perform setup steps on your computer before you can complete this step.

Check your computer’s documentation for specific setup instructions.

8

After you finish the HotSync setup, select

Done

to return to Applications

View.

0

You’re now ready to sync your smartphone with your Bluetooth computer.



9

Synchronizing over a Bluetooth connection

When you synchronize using the Bluetooth wireless feature on your smartphone, you don’t need your sync cable. This is especially useful if you travel with a laptop enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology.


on your computer:

Verify the following

•

•

•

It includes built-in Bluetooth wireless technology or a Bluetooth adapter.

Bluetooth is turned on.

HotSync manager is active. On a

Windows computer, you know HotSync manager is active when its icon appears in the lower-right corner of your screen.

1

Press

Applications

and select

HotSync

.

2

Select

Local

.

3

Select the pick list below the HotSync icon, and then select the name of the

PC you set up for Bluetooth synchronization (see Setting up a

Bluetooth connection for synchronization).

4

Select the

HotSync

icon on your smartphone.

When synchronization is complete, a message appears at the top of your smartphone screen. Be patient; synchronization may take a few minutes.


9


Synchronizing over an infrared connection

When you synchronize using the IR port on your smartphone, you don’t need your sync cable. This is especially useful if you travel with an IR-enabled laptop.


Your computer must include the following items:

•

An enabled IR port and driver or an IR device attached to it. Check your computer’s documentation to see if it supports IR communication.

•

HotSync manager must be active. On a

Windows computer, you know HotSync manager is active when its icon appears in the lower-right corner of your screen.

WINDOWS ONLY

1

On your computer, click

HotSync manager

in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your screen. Make sure that

Infrared

is selected.

2


Applications

and select

HotSync

.

3

Select

Local

.

4

Select the pick list below the HotSync icon and select

IR to a PC/Handheld

.

5

Position the IR port on your smartphone within a few inches of your computer’s

IR port.

6

Select the

HotSync





9

MAC ONLY

1

Double-click the

HotSync manager

icon in the

Palm

folder.

2

Click the

HotSync Controls

tab, and then select

Enabled

.

3

Click the

Connection Settings

tab, and then check the

On

box next to

IR port

.

4

Close the HotSync Software Setup window.

5


Applications

and select

HotSync

.

6

Select

Local

.

7

Select the pick list below the HotSync icon and select

IR to a PC/Handheld

.

8

Position the IR port on your smartphone within a few inches of your Mac’s IR port.

9

Select the

HotSync



Using expansion cards

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

The expansion card slot on your smartphone enables you to add SD cards and MultiMediaCard cards to extend the storage capacity of your smartphone

(expansion cards sold separately). Here are some examples of what SD and

MultiMediaCard expansion cards can store:

Photos

MP3 audio files

Email attachments

Games eBooks

Microsoft Office files

Adobe Acrobat files

Applications

Databases

TIP

SD cards are faster than MultiMediaCard cards for reading and writing information, and

SD cards also offer write-protection.

U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S 191

9


Your smartphone is also compatible with

SDIO cards, which you can use to add accessories, such as an FM radio module, to your smartphone.

IMPORTANT

When using an SDIO card, the SDIO card may protrude from the side of your smartphone and prevent you from closing the door of the expansion card slot.

Be careful not to damage the door.

Additionally, some SDIO cards may be too wide to fit inside the expansion door opening, so make sure the SDIO card fits inside the expansion door opening before making your purchase.

2

Hold your smartphone with the screen facing you, and hold the card with the label facing you. The notch on the card should be in the upper corner closest to the screen.

3

Insert the card into the expansion card slot until you feel it lock into place.

TIP

The expansion card slot has a

push-push

mechanism: push in gently to insert a card; push in gently to remove it.

TIP

If the Ringer switch is set to Sound On, you hear a confirmation tone when you insert or remove an expansion card.

Inserting an expansion card

1

Open the expansion slot door.

Notch

4

Close the expansion slot door.

192 U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S


9

Removing an expansion card

1

Open the expansion slot door.

2

Press the card into the expansion slot to release it from the expansion slot.

3

After you feel the expansion card slot eject the card, remove the card from the slot.

of Applications View automatically appears.

2

Select the icon for the application you want to open.

3

Press

Center

to open the application.

4

Close the expansion slot door.

Opening applications on an expansion card

After you insert an expansion card into the expansion card slot, you can open any of the applications stored on the expansion card.

1

Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot. The Card category

TIP

Install the Files application from the Palm

Software Installation CD to easily browse and manage files on an expansion card.

Accessing items stored on an expansion card

When an expansion card contains items such as pictures or songs, you can’t view them directly from the Card category in

Applications View. You must open the app that recognizes the item.


9


1

Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot. The Card category of Applications View automatically appears.

2

Select the

category

pick list in the title bar, and select

All

.

3

Select the icon for the application in which you want to open the item. For example, to view a picture, select

Pics&Videos

.

1

Press

Applications

.

Copying applications between an expansion card and your smartphone

You can copy applications from your smartphone to your expansion card and vice versa.

TIP

Before you copy an application to an expansion card, make sure that it is compatible with Palm OS software version

5.4.5 or later. Some applications do not work with expansion cards and do not allow you to store files in a location that is separate from the application.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Copy

from the

App

menu.

4

Select the

Copy To

pick list and select the destination:

Phone

or

<card name>

.

5

Select the

From

pick list and select the location of the application you want to copy:

Phone

or

<card name>

.

6

Highlight the application you want to copy.

7

Select

Copy

.



9

Viewing expansion card information 3

Select

Card Info

4

Press

Menu

.

.

5

Select

Rename Card

from the

Card

menu.

6

Enter a new name for the card.

7

Select

OK

.

The Card Info application displays general information about the expansion card that is currently in the expansion slot, and it enables you to rename and format a card.

•

Press

Applications

select

Card Info

.

TIP

If you have trouble copying info to, renaming, or formatting an expansion card, make sure the card is not write-protected.

Press

Applications

and select

Card Info

. If a

This card is read-only message appears, then the card is write-protected. If you’re using an

SD card, you can slide the write-protect tab to the opposite position to write to the card. See the instructions that came with your card for additional info.

Renaming an expansion card

If you change the contents of an expansion card, you may at some point want to rename the card to better match its contents.

1

Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot.

2

Select the

category


All

.

Formatting an expansion card

Formatting an expansion card is similar to formatting a disk on a computer. When you format an expansion card, you erase all the information stored on the card.


9


TIP

If you format a card, any photos or documents that were previously stored on the card are deleted from your desktop software the next time you sync. You can recover these files from the backup folder, or you can prevent the deletion by temporarily changing your sync settings for the affected application to Desktop overwrites handheld.

1

Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot.

2

Select the

category


All

.

3

Select

Card Info

.

4

Press

Menu

.

5

Select

Format Card

from the

Card

menu.

6

Enter a new name for the card.

7

Select

OK

.


Your personal settings

Customizing your Palm

®

Treo

™

680 smartphone is great way to make it match your lifestyle and work even harder for you.

On your smartphone

, you can easily customize the sounds, fonts, screen colors, and more. Take advantage of different levels of security. Prevent making an accidental (and expensive) phone call by locking the keyboard. Some settings can help extend the life of your smartphone battery. There are lots of ways to make your smartphone work better for you.

Benefits

•

Access applications quickly

•

Make your screen easy to read

•

•

Conserve power

Enjoy your smartphone more

C H A P T E R

10

In this chapter

System sound settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Display and appearance settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Applications settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Locking your smartphone and info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Connecting to a VPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S

10

System sound settings

When you slide the Ringer switch back to the Sound On position, it restores the previous sound settings.

Silencing sounds

You can immediately silence all alerts, ringtones, music that plays through the built-in speaker, and system sounds by sliding the Ringer switch to the Sound Off position. This does not mute the audio during a phone call.

1

Slide the

Ringer switch

to the

Sound

Off

position. Your smartphone vibrates once to let you know that you’ve turned sounds off.

2

To hear all sounds again, slide the

Ringer switch

to the

Sound On

position.

NOTE

For info on setting the vibrate option, see the section on setting alert tones in the chapters that describe the individual applications.

Sound On

Sound Off

Setting system volume levels

You can set the volume level for system sounds, such as the tone that plays when you synchronize.

TIP

If the Ringer switch is set to Sound Off, the ringer setting overrides the sound settings and all sounds are turned off.

1

Press

Applications

and select

Sounds

.

2

Select the

Application


System

.

S Y S T E M S O U N D S E T T I N G S 199

10


3

Select the

System Volume

and

Game

Volume

pick lists and select the volume levels.

Backlight

4

Select

Done

.

2

Press

Left Right

to adjust the brightness.

3

Select

Done

.

TIP

To temporarily set the backlight to the preset low setting, press

Option + Menu

.

TIP

You can also adjust the backlight and set the brightness duration during a call in Power

Preferences. See Optimizing power settings.

Display and appearance settings

Adjusting the brightness

Depending on the lighting conditions in which you’re using your smartphone, you may need to adjust the brightness of the screen and keyboard backlight.

1

Press

Option

, and then press

Backlight

.

Changing the screen font

You can change the screen font in

Calendar, Contacts, Memos, Messaging,

Tasks, and Web. The font styles may vary between applications and some applications may offer fewer choices.

1

Open the application in which you want to change the font.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Options

, and then select

Font

.

200 D I S P L A Y A N D A P P E A R A N C E S E T T I N G S


10

4

Select a font style. (In the web browser, select the

Font size


Large

or

Small

.)

3


Preset to:

The standard number conventions for your country. When you select a country, the other Formats

Preferences are automatically set to that country’s conventions. You can also edit each option individually.

Small font

Small bold font

Large bold font

Large font

5

Select

OK

.

Setting display formats

Formats Preferences enable you to select number conventions based on geographic regions. For example, in the United

Kingdom, time often is expressed using a

24-hour clock. In the United States, time is expressed using a 12-hour clock with an

AM or a PM suffix. Many of the built-in applications on your smartphone use the

Formats Preferences settings.

1

Press

Applications

select

Prefs

.

2

Select

Formats

.

Time:

The time format. Select

HH:MM

to display a 24-hour clock.

Date:

The date format.

Week starts:

The first day of the week

(usually Sunday or Monday).

Numbers:

The format for numbers with decimal points and commas.

4

Select

Done

.

D I S P L A Y A N D A P P E A R A N C E S E T T I N G S 201

10


Aligning the screen to correct tapping problems

Occasionally, your smartphone screen may need to be readjusted. If this problem occurs, you may see the wrong feature being activated when you tap the screen.

To fix the problem, you can align the screen at any time.

1

Press

Applications

select

Prefs

.

2

Select

Touchscreen

.

3

Follow the onscreen instructions and tap the screen where indicated.

Changing the system color scheme

1

Press

Applications

and select

Prefs

.

2

Select

Color Theme

.

3

Select a color scheme from the list.

4

Select

Done

.

TIP

You can also set the wallpaper for the

Main tab in the Phone application (see

Customizing the Main tab in the Phone application) and the background for Calendar

Agenda View (see Customizing display options for your calendar).

4

Select

Done

.

202 D I S P L A Y A N D A P P E A R A N C E S E T T I N G S


10

Applications settings

You can change the Applications settings on your smartphone so that you can easily access the applications you use most often. You can arrange and display your applications by category, reassign the buttons on your smartphone, and select default applications for specific tasks.

TIP

To create a new category, select the

category


Edit Categories

.

Select

New

, and then enter the category name. Select

OK

to close the dialog box, and then select

OK

.

DID YOU KNOW

?

If there is an expansion card in the expansion slot, the card appears in the category pick list and is treated as a category when you press

Applications

repeatedly.

Arranging applications by category

You can assign an application to a category and then display a specific category of applications in Applications View.

1

Press

Applications

.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Category

on the

App

menu.

4

Select the pick list next to each application and select a category.

5

Select

Done

.

Displaying applications by category


•

•

Press

Applications

repeatedly to cycle through the categories.

Select the

category

pick list at the top of the screen and select a category.

Select

All

to display all of your applications.

Changing Applications View

By default, Applications View displays each application as an icon. As an alternative, you can view a list of applications. The list view is particularly useful when you have so many applications in a category that the applications fill up more than one screen.

A P P L I C A T I O N S S E T T I N G S 203

10


1

Press

Applications

.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Options

, and then select

Preferences

.

4

Select the

View By


List

.

5

Select

OK

.

2

Select

Buttons

.

3

Select the pick list next to the item you want to reassign, and then select an application.

Reassigning buttons

With Buttons Preferences, you can select which applications are associated with the quick buttons and the Side button on your smartphone. You can assign a primary and secondary application to each of the three quick buttons that open an application.

NOTE

We recommend that you keep the primary button assignments on the factory settings until you become comfortable with the features of your smartphone. If you do change the primary button assignments, remember that the instructions in this guide and in the other help features refer to the original button settings.

4

Select

Done

.

DID YOU KNOW

?

You can also choose an application to open with the sync button on the USB sync cable. To change this setting, select

HotSync

on the Buttons Preferences screen.

TIP

To restore all the buttons and key combinations to their factory settings, select

Default

.

DID YOU KNOW

?

Some third-party applications automatically take over a button when you install the application.

1

Press

Applications

select

Prefs

.

204 A P P L I C A T I O N S S E T T I N G S


10

Changing default applications

Sometimes one application looks for another application to handle information

(for example, a mail application might open a browser when you select a link in an email message). Your smartphone comes with a set of predefined applications to handle email, messaging, and browser requests from other applications. If you have more than one application to handle these requests on your smartphone, you can specify which application you want to use for each function.

1

Press

Applications

select

Prefs

.

2

Select

Default Apps

.

3

Select each pick list and select the application you want to associate with that function.

4

Select

Done

.

Locking your smartphone and info

Your smartphone includes several features to protect your smartphone from inadvertent use and keep your information private. You can lock any of the following features on your smartphone:

Keyboard (Keyguard):

You can use the

Keyguard feature to disable the keyboard and all buttons to prevent accidental presses in your bag or pocket.

Screen:

You can disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature during an active call or call alert.

Phone (Phone Lock):

You can set your phone to require a password to make calls.

The built-in security software lets you make emergency calls even if your phone is locked.

L O C K I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O 205

10


smartphone:

You can set your smartphone to require a password for you to see any information on your smartphone.

Entries:

You can mask or hide entries marked as private and set your smartphone to require a password for viewing them.

2

Press

Center

to turn off

Keyguard

.

Locking your keyboard (Keyguard)

The Keyguard feature locks the keyboard so that you don’t accidentally press buttons or activate items on the screen while your smartphone is in a pocket or bag.

By default, Keyguard turns on whenever the screen is off. Each time you wake up the screen, you must turn off Keyguard to unlock the keyboard and use your smartphone.

To turn off Keyguard, do the following:

1

When the screen is off, press

Power/

End

to wake up the screen.

You can change how quickly Keyguard turns on, or you can disable this feature altogether. To change the Keyguard settings, do the following:

1

Press

Applications

and select

Prefs

.

2

Select

Keyguard

.

3

Select the

Auto-Keyguard

pick list, and then do one of the following:

•

Select how quickly you want Keyguard to turn on:

When power is turned off

,

5 seconds after power off

, or

30 seconds after power off

.

•

Select

Disable

to completely disable the Keyguard feature until you turn it on again by pressing

Option +

206 L O C K I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O


10

4

Power/End

o n.

Select

Done

.

when the screen is

Locking your screen

You can set your smartphone to automatically lock the screen’s touch-sensitive features in certain situations.

1

Press

Applications

and

Prefs

.

2

Select

Keyguard

.

3

Check any of the following boxes:

Incoming calls received:

Disables the screen when the phone rings. You must use the

5-way

to select the onscreen Answer and Ignore buttons, or press

Send

to answer the call or

Power/End

call.

to ignore the

On a call:

Disables the screen after you answer a call. You must use the

5-way

to select the onscreen buttons during the call. Use this setting to avoid accidentally pressing onscreen buttons while you’re holding your smartphone near your ear to speak.

4

Select

Done

.

DID YOU KNOW

?

When you check the boxes to disable the touchscreen during a call, the touchscreen is automatically enabled again after you end the call.

Locking your phone (Phone Lock)

You can lock your SIM card to prevent unauthorized calls and use of other wireless features. When your SIM card is locked, you must enter the correct PIN code to unlock it, even if you move it to a different phone. You can still make emergency calls when your phone is locked, however.

IMPORTANT

If your SIM card is locked and you enter the wrong PIN more than three times, you must call your wireless service provider for your unique PIN unlock key (PUK) to unlock your SIM card.

TIP

When Phone Lock is turned on, other people can still see the info on your smartphone, but they cannot make or receive phone calls or use the other wireless features without your password.


10


1

Press

Phone

.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Options

, and then select

Phone

Lock

.

4

Check the

Lock SIM

box.

5

When prompted, enter the current

PIN

and select

OK

. (Unless you changed your PIN, enter the default PIN, provided with your wireless service provider’s account materials.)

6

If you want to change the PIN, select

Change PIN

, enter a new PIN, and then select

OK

. Repeat this step to verify the new PIN.

7

If your SIM card supports fixed number dialing (FDN), select

Advanced

and check the

Enable Fixed Number

Dialing

box to restrict dialing to the numbers in your FDN list. When prompted, enter your

PIN2

and then select

OK

.

8

Turn your phone off to activate the phone lock feature.

9

To turn your phone on again, press and hold

Power/End

, enter your

PIN, and then select

OK

to unlock your smartphone.

TIP

To manage your FDN list, press

Applications

select

SIM Book

, press

Menu

, and then select

Modify FDN

from the

Options

menu.

Your SIM card locks again when you turn off your smartphone and then turn it back on.

To disable the current Phone Lock settings:

1

Press

Phone

.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Options

, and then select

Phone

Lock

.

4

Uncheck the

Lock SIM

box.

5

Enter your

PIN

code.

6

Select

OK

.

Locking your smartphone

To protect your personal information, you can lock your smartphone so that you need to enter your password to access any of your information or use any of the features on your smartphone, including the phone.

You can, however, still make emergency calls when your smartphone is locked.



10

IMPORTANT

If you lock your smartphone, you must enter the exact password to unlock it. If you forget the password, you need to perform a hard reset to resume using your smartphone. Performing a hard reset deletes all the entries in your smartphone. If you use password protection in Palm Desktop software, you must remember your password to restore your info. However, if you

do not

use password protection in Palm Desktop software, you can restore all previously synchronized info the next time you sync

(see Synchronizing information—the basics).

3

Assign a password and a password hint.

4

Select the

Auto Lock Device

box.

5

When prompted, enter your password and select

OK

.

6

Select one of the following options:

Never:

Prevents your smartphone from locking automatically.

1

Press

Applications

select

Security

.

2

Select the

Password

box.

On power off:

Locks your smartphone when you turn off the screen, or when it shuts off with the Auto-off feature.

At a preset time:

Locks your smartphone at a specific time of day.

After a preset delay:

Locks your smartphone after a period of inactivity.

7

Select

OK

.


10


8


•

Select

Lock & Turn Off

to lock your smartphone immediately.

•

Press

Applications

to accept your settings and continue using your smartphone.

TIP

After you create a password, you can lock your system manually. Press

Applications

and select

Security

. Select

Lock & Turn Off

, and then select

Off & Lock

.

TIP

To change your password, select the

Password

box, enter your current password, and then enter the new password. To delete your password, select the

Password

box and then select

Unassign

.

Mask Records:

Private entries are replaced with a gray bar that lets you know the entry is there but keeps it from being legible.

After you enable the mask or hide setting, any entries marked as private are immediately hidden or masked. If you define a password, you must enter it to display private entries. If you do not define a password, you (or anyone else) can reveal private entries without a password.

1

Open the entry that you want to mark private.

2

Select

Details

.

3

Check the

Private

box.

4

Select

OK

.

Working with private entries

In most applications, you can mark individual entries as private. All private entries remain visible and accessible until you select the Security setting. You have three Security setting options:

Show Records:

Private records are visible.

Hide Records:

Private entries do not appear anywhere in the application.

Hiding or masking all private entries

Make sure the entries you want to mask or hide are marked private.

1

Press

Applications

and select

Security

.

2

Select the

Current Privacy

pick list and select either

Hide Records

or

Mask

Records

.



10

3

1

2

If prompted for your password, enter it and then select

application

Press

Menu

3

Select

Options

, and then select

Security

.

OK

.

.

Viewing all private records

You can reveal all the entries you’ve hidden or masked.

1

Press

Applications

select

Security

.

2

Select the

Current Privacy


Show Records

.

3


OK

.

Viewing private entries in a specific

Open the application that contains the private entries you want to see.

4

Select the

Current Privacy


Show Records

.

5

Select

OK

.

6


OK

.

Security and Palm Desktop software

(Windows)

You can set the Windows version of

Palm

®

Desktop software to observe the security password for your smartphone. If you forget your password, you cannot view your information in Palm Desktop. If your smartphone is unlocked, you can change your password on your smartphone, but all entries marked as private are deleted. You can restore your private entries the next time you sync and then create a new password.

Follow these steps to recover from a lost password:

1

Press

Applications

and select

Security

.

2

Select the

Password

box.

3

Select

Lost Password

.

4

Select

Yes

.

TIP

If you want additional security for

Palm Desktop files, you may want to purchase a third-party solution.


10


Entering owner information

You can use Owner Preferences to record information that you want to associate with your smartphone, such as your name, company name, and home phone number.

If you lock your smartphone (see Locking your smartphone), the Owner Preferences information appears on the screen that requests your password to unlock it, and you must also enter your password to change the Owner Preferences information.

1

Press

Applications

select

Prefs

.

2

Select

Owner

.

3

If you assigned a password with the

Security application, select

Unlock

, enter your password, and then select

OK

to continue.

4

Enter the text that you want to appear in the Owner Preferences screen.

5

Select

Done

.

System settings

Setting the date and time

Date & Time Preferences enable you to manually set the date, time, and location

(time zone) setting for your smartphone.

You can also set your smartphone to synchronize the date, time, and time zone with your wireless service provider network when your phone is on, you are inside a coverage area, and the date, time, and time zone are available from the network.

1

Press

Applications

and select

Prefs

.

212 S Y S T E M S E T T I N G S


10

2

Select

Date & Time

.

3

Select the

Automatically set

pick list and select one of the following settings:

Date, time and time zone:

The date, time, and time zone are acquired from your wireless service provider’s network (if settings are available from the network).

Date and time:

Lets you set the time zone manually. The date and time are acquired from your wireless service provider’s network (if settings are available from the network).

Nothing:

Lets you set the date, time, and time zone manually. No info is acquired from your wireless service provider’s network.

4

If the

Location

pick list appears, select it, and then select a city in your time zone.

TIP

If a city in the same time zone is not on the list, select

Edit List

, select

Add

, select a city in your time zone, and then select

OK

. If necessary, modify any of the settings in the

Edit Location dialog box, and then select

OK

.

5

If the Date and Time fields appear, select the

Date

field and select the date, and then select the

Time

field and select the time.

6

Select

Done

.

TIP

You can also set time zones for Calendar events. See Creating an event.

Optimizing power settings

Power Preferences enable you to adjust settings to maximize the battery’s performance.

1

Press

Applications

and select

Prefs

.

2

Select

Power

.

S Y S T E M S E T T I N G S 213

10


3


Brightness:

Sets the intensity of the screen and keyboard backlights. Drag the slider or press

Left Right

to adjust the brightness level.

Beam Receive:

Determines whether your smartphone is ready to receive information over an infrared beam. If you leave this option turned off, you must return to this screen to turn on this option the next time you want to receive a beam.

4

Select

Done

.

TIP

You can also access the brightness setting by pressing

Option + P

. To temporarily set the backlight to the preset low setting, press

Option + Menu

.

Auto-off after:

Determines how long your screen stays on during a period of inactivity. When there is no interaction with the keyboard or screen for the specified time period, your smartphone turns off automatically.

On a call, dim backlight after:

Determines how long the backlight stays on at normal intensity during a phone call. After the specified time period, the backlight dims to conserve power during a long phone call.

Connecting to a VPN

If you want to use your smartphone to access your corporate email account or other files on your corporate server, you may need to set up a virtual private network (VPN) on your smartphone. A VPN enables you to log in to your corporate server through the company’s firewall

(security layer). You need a VPN client on your smartphone if your smartphone and your company’s server are located on opposite sides of the firewall.

214 C O N N E C T I N G T O A V P N


10

Check with your company’s system administrator to see if a VPN is required to access the corporate server. If a VPN is necessary, you must purchase and install a third-party VPN client on your smartphone to use this feature.

1

Install your third-party VPN client. See

Installing applications for details.

2

Press

Applications

and select

Prefs

.

3

Select

VPN

.

4

Enter the settings provided by your corporate system administrator.

TIP

For information about third-party VPN client software, see the Palm Software

Installation CD or visit www.palm.com/ treo680gsm.

C O N N E C T I N G T O A V P N 215

10


216 C O N N E C T I N G T O A V P N

Common questions

Although we can’t anticipate all the questions you might have, this chapter provides answers to some of the most commonly asked questions. For additional information and answers to other common questions, visit www.palm.com/ treo680gsm-support.

C H A P T E R

11

In this chapter

Upgrading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Desktop software installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Resetting your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Hands-free devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Making room on your smartphone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Third-party applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S

11

Upgrading

If you experience problems with your

Palm

®

Treo

™

680 smartphone after performing the upgrade steps in this guide, you may have incompatible applications or settings that were not quarantined during the installation process. These

Incompatible applications or settings can lead to numerous issues, including system resets and freezes. If you experience a problem after upgrading, follow the steps in this section to remove the incompatible apps from your smartphone and to transfer your other info to your new smartphone.

NOTE

If you have trouble installing a third-party application, contact the developer for assistance.

We recommend that you

do not

install apps that do any of the following:

•

•

Modify phone functions, such as ringtones, dialing, or caller ID

Replace organizer features, such as

Contacts or Calendar

•

•

•

Set data connection features, such as activating or ending data connections

Provide web clipping features, such as

PQA files

Provide instant messaging features

If you want to continue using these types of applications, please contact the third-party developer for software updates and info about compatibility with your smartphone.

WINDOWS ONLY

IMPORTANT

If your computer is running

Windows Vista, before you install the software on the Palm CD, visit www.palm.com/windowsvista for more information.

1

On your computer, click

Start >

Programs > Palm > Safe HotSync.

2

Follow the instructions on the screen.

3

Locate the

Old_Apps

folder on your computer. This folder is usually located inside one of the following folders:

C:\Program Files\Palm\

C:\Program Files\palmOne\

C:\Program Files\Handspring\

U P G R A D I N G 219

11


4

To help you identify the app that is

5

causing the problem, move one app at a time from the

Backup

NOTE

Old_Apps

folder, and then sync.

If the problem recurs, delete the last app you installed and report the problem to its developer.

Repeat step 4 for each of the apps in the

Old_Apps

folder.

If you have trouble moving apps from the Old_Apps folder to the Backup folder, or determining which files to move, try reinstalling the app using the original third-party developer files.

folder to the

TIP

Need more info on the Backup folder? See

What is the backup folder?.

MAC ONLY

1

Locate your

user

folder on your computer.

NOTE

Your user folder name is the same as your device name and is usually found in this location:

<Mac hard drive> : Users :

<your Mac username> : Documents :

Palm : Users

2

Select your

user

folder and Option-drag it to your Mac desktop to make a copy of that folder.

3

Confirm that your copy includes the

Backup

subfolder and that all the files in the original Backup subfolder are also in the copy of the Backup subfolder.

4

Delete all files from the original

Backup

subfolder.

5

Perform a hard reset on your smartphone. See Resetting your smartphone for instructions.

6

Sync your smartphone with your new desktop software and be sure to select your existing device name from the

User list.

7

To help you identify the app that is causing the problem, move one third-party app from the copy of the

Backup

subfolder to the original

Backup

subfolder, and then sync.

If the problem recurs, delete the last app you installed and report the problem to its developer.

8

Repeat step 7 for each of the third-party apps in the copy of the

Backup

folder.

220 U P G R A D I N G


11

Desktop software installation

If you are having trouble installing the desktop software, you may have the wrong version of the software or some of your computer’s resources may be unavailable.

TIP

The Palm Software Installation CD installs software that lets you synchronize using

Palm

®

Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook for Windows. If you want to synchronize using a different personal information manager

(PIM), you must install a third-party solution.

Contact the PIM’s author or vendor to learn if software is available for your smartphone.

3

Quit any active applications, including virus scanners and Internet security applications.

4

Make sure you’re installing the software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your new smartphone.

Other versions of the desktop software may not work with your smartphone.

5

Insert the Palm Software Installation CD to restart the installation.

IMPORTANT


Follow these steps to retry the installation.

1

Make sure your computer profile includes administrator rights to install software. In large organizations, these are usually granted by the system administrator.

2

Restart your computer.

Resetting your smartphone

Performing a soft reset

Performing a soft reset is similar to restarting a computer. If your smartphone is not responding or you have trouble

D E S K T O P S O F T W A R E I N S T A L L A T I O N 221

11

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S synchronizing with your computer, a soft reset may help. All your info is retained when you perform a soft reset.

1

Remove the battery from your smartphone, and then reinsert it.

Don’t know how? See Replacing the battery.

NOTE

The reset begins when you reinsert the battery.


2

When the Palm logo appears, press and hold

Up

until the black status bar at the bottom of the screen fills and disappears, and then release

Up

.

3

Delete the third-party application that you suspect is causing the problem.

4

Perform a soft reset. The wireless features of your smartphone are not available until you complete this step.

2

At the end of the soft reset, Date &

Time Preferences appears. Select

Done

.

Performing a system reset

A system reset, also called a safe or warm reset, tells your smartphone to stop what it’s doing and start over again without loading any system extras. If your smartphone loops or freezes during or after a soft reset, a system reset may help.

Performing a system reset can release your smartphone from an endless loop so that you can uninstall a third-party application that may be causing the looping.

1


Performing a hard reset

A hard reset erases all information and third-party software on your smartphone.

Never perform a hard reset without first trying a soft reset and a system reset, and trying to resolve third-party software issues. (See Third-party applications for suggestions on diagnosing third-party software issues.) After a hard reset, you can restore previously synchronized information the next time you sync.

IMPORTANT

If you set a password on your smartphone, performing a hard reset reformats your smartphone. This is a more severe form of a hard reset, which

222 R E S E T T I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E


11 removes all your information, and restores your formats, preferences, and other settings to the factory default settings. your smartphone until the process is complete. This may take up to 10 minutes.

TIP

Some third-party applications do not create a backup on your computer when you synchronize. If you perform a hard reset, you may lose data in these applications and you will need to reinstall the application after the hard reset. Please contact the application’s developer to find out which data is backed up during synchronization.

4

When the language selection screen appears, select the same language you selected for your desktop software.

IMPORTANT


1



2

When the Palm logo appears, press and hold

Power/End

until the black status bar at the bottom of the screen fills and disappears, and then release

Power/End

.

3

When the

Erase all data?

prompt appears, press

Up

to confirm the hard reset.

IMPORTANT

If a

Reformatting in progress

message appears, do not touch

5

(Optional) If you want to confirm that the hard reset was successful, press

Applications

and select

HotSync

. If you see your device name in the upper-right corner, the hard reset was

not

successful.

Replacing the battery

Your smartphone comes with a replaceable battery. Be sure to use a replacement battery that is recommended or sold by

R E P L A C I N G T H E B A T T E R Y 223

11


Palm and is compatible with the smartphone.

CAUTION

Failure to use the proper battery may result in a risk of personal injury or product damage, and it voids your smartphone warranty.

4

Align the metal contacts on the new battery with the contacts inside the battery compartment, insert the new battery into the compartment at a

45-degree angle, and then press it into place.

1

Press

Power/End

the screen.

to turn off

2

Press the

battery door release

, and slide the battery door downward to remove it from your smartphone.

Battery contacts

Smartphone contacts


3

Place a finger in the notch next to the battery, and lift up the old battery at a

45-degree angle to remove it from the compartment.

IMPORTANT


not

use a battery from another smartphone model in your smartphone. Similarly, do

not

use the smartphone battery in another smartphone model. Using a battery that is designed for another smartphone model can damage your smartphone.

5

Slide the battery door onto the back of the smartphone until it clicks into place.

224 R E P L A C I N G T H E B A T T E R Y


11

6

Connect your smartphone to the charger or sync cable to charge the new battery.

TIP

Be sure to dispose of your old battery properly. In some areas, disposal in household or business trash is prohibited.

Screen

screen brightness (see Adjusting the brightness).

4

If the screen is still blank, perform a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset).

5

If the problem persists, connect your smartphone to the charger (see

Charging the battery) and perform a soft reset again.

6

If that doesn’t work, perform a hard reset (see Performing a hard reset).

The screen appears blank

1

When a call lasts longer than the limit specified in Power Preferences, the screen dims automatically. In certain lighting conditions, the screen may appear blank when this occurs.

Press any key except Power/End to restore the screen to normal brightness.

Pressing Power/End hangs up the call.

The screen doesn’t respond accurately to taps or it activates wrong features

1

2

TIP

To find carrying cases that protect the screen and other useful accessories, visit www.palm.com/treo680gsm.

Press

Applications

Use the

5-way

.

to select

Prefs

2

When a period of inactivity lasts longer than the limit specified in Power

3

Use the

5-way

Touchscreen

.

to select

Preferences, the screen turns off. Press and release

Power/End

to

4

Follow the onscreen instructions to align the screen.

wake up the screen.

5

Select

Done

.

3

Look closely at the screen. If you can see a dim image, try adjusting the

.

S C R E E N 225

11


6

If the problem persists, check for dirt between the screen and the edge of the smartphone.

7

If you’re using a screen protector, make sure that it is properly installed.

There’s a blinking bell in the upper-left corner

The blinking bell in the upper-left corner of the screen is the Alert icon. It appears when you have alarms or messages that you haven’t acknowledged.

1

Press and hold

Center

or tap the blinking bell with your stylus.

2

When the list of pending alerts appears, do either of the following:

•

Select the text of the alert to view the item. The item stays in the list.

•

Check the box next to an alert to clear it from the list, and then select

Done

.

and vice versa. If you ever need to perform a hard reset or otherwise need to erase all your information on your smartphone, you can synchronize your smartphone with your computer to restore the info. Similarly, if your computer crashes and your Palm

Desktop info is damaged, you can recover your info by synchronizing with your smartphone. To make sure you always have an up-to-date backup of your info, synchronize frequently.

This section describes synchronization between your smartphone and a desktop computer running Palm Desktop software.

You can also synchronize the information on your smartphone using third-party applications. See the documentation for the third-party application for information on features and configuration.

Before you attempt to synchronize, make sure you’ve installed the desktop synchronization software from the Palm

Software Installation CD.

Synchronization

Synchronization backs up the information from your smartphone onto your computer

TIP

Every device needs a unique name. Never synchronize more than one device to the same device name on your computer.

226 S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N


11

I can’t find my user folder

Windows:

If your device name is one word, your user folder name is the first six characters of your device name. If your device name is two words, your user folder name consists of the first six characters of the second word of your device name followed by the first letter of the first word.

For example, if your device name is John

Smith, your user folder is named SmithJ.

Your user folder is usually located inside one of the following folders:

C:\Program Files\Palm\

C:\Program Files\palmOne\

C:\Program Files\Handspring\

Mac:

Your user folder name is the same as your device name and is usually found in this location:

<Mac hard drive> : Users :

<your Mac username> : Documents :

Palm : Users

Backup folder.) The next time you sync,

HotSync Manager compares the contents of the Backup folder to the contents of your smartphone, and then restores any missing info or applications.

If an app that you deleted reappears on your smartphone, try deleting the app from your Backup folder.

Palm Desktop does not respond to a sync attempt

1

Make sure that the USB sync cable is securely connected to the USB port on your computer and on the bottom of your smartphone (see Synchronizing information—the basics).

TIP

If you’re having trouble trying to sync using an IR or Bluetooth

®

wireless technology connection, try using the USB sync cable instead. If this solves the problem, then check your IR or Bluetooth settings (see

Synchronizing information—advanced).

What is the backup folder?

The Backup folder is located inside your user folder (see I can’t find my user folder).

During synchronization, HotSync

®

Manager puts a copy of most of your info and applications in the Backup folder. (Some third-party apps do not put a copy in the

2

Make sure that HotSync manager is running:

Windows:

Right-click

HotSync manager

in the taskbar in the

S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N 227

11

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S lower-right corner of your computer screen, and make sure that

Local USB

is checked. If you don’t see the HotSync manager icon, click

Start

, select

Programs

, select

Palm

, and then select

HotSync Manager

.

Mac:

Find the

Palm

folder on your Mac hard drive. Double-click the

HotSync manager

icon in the

Palm

folder. In the Connection Settings panel, set the

Local Setup port

to

Palm USB

.

3

Synchronize. If the synchronization is successful, you do not need to complete the remaining steps.

4

Perform a soft reset (see Performing a soft reset).

5


6

If problems persist and you’re synchronizing through a USB hub, try connecting the sync cable to a different

USB port or directly to your computer’s built-in USB port.

7


8

Check the multi-connector on the bottom of your smartphone for debris or discoloration. Carefully clean the connector by dipping a cotton swab in some rubbing alcohol and gently wiping the metal contacts on the connector.

Try to sync again.

9

Check the connector on the USB sync cable for integrity and cleanliness. Make sure the pins on the connector are straight, protruding, and not damaged. If the cable appears to be damaged, stop here and locate another USB sync cable.

10

WINDOWS ONLY

Uninstall

Palm Desktop software. Click

Start

, select

Settings

, select

Control Panel

, select

Add or Remove Programs

, select


, and then click

Change/Remove

.



11

NOTE

option for uninstalling Palm Desktop software. Contact Technical Support if the problem persists after completing step 7.

11

Mac computers do not provide an


12

Reinstall Palm Desktop software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your smartphone.

Synchronization starts but stops without finishing

1

Locate your

Backup

subfolder and rename the folder (for example,

BackupOld).


Files\Palm\<device name>

Mac: <Mac hard drive> : Applications

: Palm : Users : <device name>

NOTE

Can’t find a Palm folder in Program

Files? Then look for a palmOne or

Handspring folder instead. For more info, see I can’t find my user folder.

TIP

The HotSync Log can give you information about your most recent synchronization.

Windows:

Right-click the

HotSync manager

icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen, and then select

View

Log

.

Mac:

Open Palm Desktop software. From the

HotSync

menu, select

View Log

.

If you upgraded from a previous Palm OS

® device or received a system error, such as

Sys0505, there may be conflicts with software on your smartphone.

2

Synchronize.

3

If the problem is resolved, begin reinstalling your third-party applications one at a time by double-clicking a single file in the original

Backup

subfolder that you renamed, and sync after each application you install. If the problem recurs, delete the last application you installed and report the problem to its developer.

4

WINDOWS ONLY

If the Windows

New Hardware Wizard appears, the synchronization process may be timing out before the wizard completes its job.


11


Follow all instructions in the New

Hardware Wizard, and then sync again.

5

WINDOWS ONLY

Uninstall


Start

, select

Settings

, select

Control Panel

, select


, select


, and then click

Change/Remove

.

NOTE

Mac computers do not provide an option for uninstalling Palm Desktop software. Contact Technical Support if the problem persists after completing step 3.

6


7

Reinstall Palm Desktop software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your smartphone. and select

Change your synchronization method

if necessary.

If you use a different PIM, you need to install third-party software to synchronize. For more information, consult the company that makes the

PIM.

2

If multiple Palm OS devices are synchronizing with your computer, make sure the name of the device you are synchronizing appears in the

User

field on the toolbar of Palm Desktop software.

3

Open HotSync manager on your computer, and make sure the necessary conduits are set to


.

NOTE

If you need to change the setting to


, be sure to check the

Set as default

box as well.

Synchronization finishes but info doesn’t appear where it should

1

Make sure you’re synchronizing with the intended desktop personal information manager (PIM). The Palm

Software Installation CD enables you to choose whether you want to synchronize with Palm Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook for

Windows. Reinsert the installation CD

4

WINDOWS ONLY

Uninstall


Start

, select

Settings

, select

Control Panel

, select


, select


, and then click

Change/Remove

.



11

MAC ONLY

Mac computers do not provide an option for uninstalling Palm

Desktop software. Contact Technical

Support if the problem persists after completing step 3.

5


6

Reinstall Palm Desktop software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your smartphone.

7

(Outlook only) If you’re trying to synchronize offline, set your Outlook

Calendar, Contacts, Notes, and Tasks to be available offline.

TIP

Outlook subfolders and public folders are not accessible with the included software. You may wish to use a third-party solution instead.

TIP

(Outlook only) If you want to sync your info with a global Exchange Address Book, you must copy the addresses to your local

Contacts list in Outlook (right-click the addresses and select

Add to Personal

Address Book

).

TIP

For more info on Outlook conduits, right-click the

HotSync manager

icon in the taskbar, select

Custom

, select an app with

Outlook in its name, and then select

Help

.

I have duplicate entries in Microsoft

Outlook after I sync

1

Open Microsoft Outlook and delete the duplicate entries.

2

On your computer, go to the application with duplicate entries and manually enter any info you added to your smartphone since the last time you synchronized.

3

Right-click

HotSync manager

in the taskbar and select

Custom

.

4

Select an application that has duplicate entries and also has Outlook in its name.

5

Click

Change

.

6

Select

Desktop overwrites handheld

, and then click

OK

.

7

If more than one application has duplicate entries, repeat steps 4 through 6 for each application with duplicates.

8

Click

Done

.

9

Synchronize your smartphone and your computer.


11


My appointments show up in the wrong time slot after I sync

If you create an appointment in the wrong time zone (i.e., your desktop was set to the wrong time zone), it shows up in the wrong time zone on your smartphone. To be safe, enable local network time and avoid assigning time zones to your appointments.

If you’re using

Microsoft Outlook

:

1

Make sure that you installed the

Microsoft Outlook conduit that came with your smartphone. If you’re not sure whether this software is installed, reinstall Palm Desktop software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your smartphone.

2

Open Microsoft Outlook and correct the wrong entries.

3

On your computer, manually enter any

Calendar info you added to your smartphone since the last time you synchronized.

4

Click

HotSync manager


Custom

.

5

Select an application that has both

Calendar and Outlook in its name.

6

Click

Change

.

7

Select


, and then click

OK

.

8


9

Repeat steps 4 through 6 to open the

Calendar Change HotSync Action dialog box again.

10

Make sure


is selected and

Set as default

is checked, and then click

OK

.

You should now be able to assign time zones to your events without encountering this problem.

If you’re using


:

1


Calendar

.

2

Press

Menu

.

3

Select

Options

, and then select

Preferences

.

4

Uncheck the

New events use time zones

box (if it’s checked).

5

On your computer, open Palm Desktop software and correct the wrong entries.



11

6

On your computer, manually enter any

Calendar info you added to your smartphone since the last time you synchronized.

7

Click

HotSync manager


Custom

.

8

Select

Calendar

.

9

Click

Change

.

10

Select


, and then click

OK

.

11


12

Repeat steps 7 through 9 to open the

Calendar Change HotSync Action dialog box again.

13

Make sure


is selected and

Set as default

is checked, and then click

OK

.

You should now be able to assign time zones to your events without encountering this problem.

IMPORTANT

To avoid this problem in the future, do not assign time zones to your events. Palm Desktop software does not support time zones.

The text of my memos is truncated after I sync

If you use your desktop software to create a memo that is longer than 4,096 characters, the excess characters are truncated when you transfer the memo to your smartphone.

Phone

Signal strength is weak

Become familiar with low coverage areas where you live, commute, work, and play.

Then you will know when to expect signal strength issues. You can check signal strength by looking at the

signal-strength

icon in the title bar of the Main tab in the Phone application. The stronger the signal, the more bars that appear. If you are outside a coverage area, no bars appear.

1

If you’re standing, move about ten feet in any direction.

2

If you’re in a building, move near a window. Open any metal blinds.

3

If you’re in a building, move outdoors or to a more open area.

P H O N E 233

11


4

If you’re outdoors, move away from large buildings, trees, or electrical wires.

5

If you’re in a vehicle, move your smartphone so that it’s close to a window of your vehicle.

• the microphone hole, which is on the bottom right side of the smartphone.

If you’re using the speakerphone feature with your smartphone lying on a flat surface, try turning the smartphone face down (screen facing the surface).

My smartphone won’t connect to the mobile network

1

Try the suggestions about signal strength described in Signal strength is weak.

2

Turn off your phone and turn it on again

(see Turning your phone on and off).

3

Remove the SIM card and reinsert it

(see Inserting the SIM card and battery).

4


The other person hears an echo

•

•

Try decreasing the volume on your smartphone to avoid coupling or feedback on the other person’s end.

This applies to both the speakerphone and the earpiece.

Position the earpiece closer to your ear to prevent sound leaking back to the microphone. Keep your hand away from

I hear my own voice echo

Ask the person on the other end of the call to turn down the volume on his or her phone or to hold the phone closer to his or her ear.

My voice is too quiet on the other end

•

Be sure to place the bottom of the smartphone, or the hands-free microphone, close to your mouth.

•

Check the

signal-strength

icon in the title bar of the Main tab in the

Phone application. If the signal is weak

(few bars are displayed), try the suggestions about signal strength described in Signal strength is weak.

I hear static or interference

Check the

signal-strength

icon in the title bar of the Main tab in the Phone application. If the signal is weak (few bars

234 P H O N E


11 are displayed), try the suggestions about signal strength described in Signal strength is weak.

If you’re using a Bluetooth hands-free device, see I hear static or interference when using my Bluetooth hands-free device.

You may also want to disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature during incoming calls (see Locking your screen).

TIP

To find carrying cases that can help prevent your smartphone from making calls, as well as other useful accessories, visit www.palm.com/treo680gsm.

My phone seems to turn off by itself

If a system error and reset occur, the smartphone automatically turns the phone on if it was on before the reset. However, if the smartphone can’t determine if your phone was on before the reset, the phone does not automatically turn on (see Turning your phone on and off). If the problem persists and you’re using third-party applications, see Third-party applications for additional suggestions.

Hands-free devices

TIP

Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet in optimum environmental conditions.

Performance and range may be affected by physical obstacles, radio interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors.

My smartphone makes or answers calls when it’s in a bag or pocket

Items in your bag or pocket may be pressing the onscreen Answer button or otherwise activating screen items. If this happens, be sure to press

Power/End

to turn off the screen before placing your smartphone in a bag or pocket.

I can’t make or receive calls using a

Bluetooth hands-free device

Confirm all the following:

•

The Bluetooth device is compatible with your smartphone. Go to www.palm.com/treo680gsm-support for a list of compatible devices.

H A N D S - F R E E D E V I C E S 235

11


•

•

•

•

Press

Applications

and select

Bluetooth

. Make sure the

Bluetooth

setting is

On

.

You have already formed a partnership between your smartphone and your hands-free device, and the hands-free device appears in the Trusted Devices list. (see Connecting to a Bluetooth hands-free device).

Your hands-free device is charged and turned on.

Your smartphone is within range of the hands-free device.

If the problem persists, turn the

Bluetooth

setting

Off

and then turn it

On

again. If it still persists, create a new partnership with the hands-free device (see Connecting to a

Bluetooth hands-free device).

I hear static or interference when using my Bluetooth hands-free device

•

Try moving your smartphone closer to the hands-free device. Audio quality degrades as the distance between your smartphone and hands-free device increases. The effective range for a device varies between manufacturers.

•

•

Confirm that no obstructions, including your body, are between your smartphone and your hands-free device.

If the problem persists, turn the

Bluetooth

setting

Off

and then turn it back on again. If it still persists, create a new partnership with the hands-free device (see Connecting to a Bluetooth hands-free device).

TIP

For best performance, keep your

Bluetooth hands-free device and your phone on the same side of your body.

Some features of my Bluetooth hands-free device don’t work with my smartphone

•

Check the Palm compatibility list at www.palm.com/treo680gsm-support to ensure that your device is compatible.

•

Check the documentation that came with your device or the manufacturer’s website for information specific to your device.

236 H A N D S - F R E E D E V I C E S


11

Email

you cannot exchange multimedia messages.

•

For troubleshooting info on the

VersaMail

®

application, see the

User

Guide for the VersaMail Application

on your computer.

Windows:


Mac



in the

Documentation

folder.

Messaging

I can’t tell if data services are available

When your phone is on, icons appear in the title bar in the Main tab in the Phone application to indicate whether data services are available and whether a data connection is active. Make sure that either of the following icons appears in the title bar of the Main tab: . If you do not see either of these icons, data services are not available in your current location and

I can’t send or receive text messages

•

Make sure your SIM card is inserted correctly (see Inserting the SIM card and battery) and your phone is turned on

(see Turning your phone on and off).

•

Contact your wireless service provider to verify that your plan includes text messaging services, that these services have been correctly activated, and that they are available at your location. Your wireless service provider should be able to tell you if text messaging services have been experiencing transmission delays. Delays can also occur between the time that a message is sent and the time it is received.

•

•

Verify with the recipient that the receiving device can handle text messages.

If a text message arrives but does not display an alert, perform a soft reset

(see Performing a soft reset).

E M A I L 237

11


238 W E B

I can’t send or receive multimedia messages

•

Make sure your phone is turned on (see

Turning your phone on and off).

•

•

•

•

Contact your wireless service provider to verify that your plan includes multimedia messaging services (MMS), that these services have been correctly activated, and that they are available at your location. Your wireless service provider should be able to tell you if multimedia messaging services have been experiencing transmission delays.

Delays can also occur between the time that a message is sent and the time it is received.

Make sure that either of the following icons appears in the title bar of the Main tab: . If you do not see either of these icons, data services are not available in your current location and you cannot exchange multimedia messages.

Verify with the recipient that the receiving device can handle multimedia messages.

If a message arrives but does not display an alert, perform a soft reset

(see Performing a soft reset).

Web

I can’t tell if data services are available

When your phone is on, icons appear in the title bar in the Main tab in the Phone application to indicate whether data services are available and whether a data connection is active. Make sure that either of the following icons appears in the title bar of the Main tab: . If you do not see either of these icons, data services are not available in your current location and you cannot connect to the Internet.

My smartphone won’t connect to the

Internet

Your smartphone supports GPRS and

EDGE wireless data networks. To connect to the Internet, you must subscribe to and activate data services with your wireless service provider, and you must be in a location with data coverage.

1

Press and hold

Power/End

turn off your phone. Then press to and hold the same button to turn it back on again.


11

2

Press

Phone

and look for either of the following icons in the title bar of the

Main tab: .

•

Data services have been activated on your account.

3

If you see these icons, you are in a data

•

Data coverage is available in your location.

coverage area. Try connecting to the

Internet again. If you do not see either

•

There are no data service outages in your location.

of these icons, press

Applications

, select

Prefs

, and continue with the

I can’t access a web page

following steps.

First, make sure you have Internet access:

4

Select

Network

.

Open the web browser and try to view

5

Select the

Service

pick list and select your wireless service provider’s data

6

service.

Select

Connect

.

another web page you’ve loaded before. To ensure you’re viewing the page directly from the Internet, press

Menu

Go

, and then select

Refresh

.

,

7

If the connection is successful, go to the web browser. If you still can’t make a connection, perform a soft reset (see

Performing a soft reset).

8

9

If your phone did not turn on automatically after the soft reset, press and hold

Power/End

to turn on your phone, and try connecting to the

Internet.

Contact your wireless service provider to verify the following:

If you can view the other web page after you refresh it, but you still can’t access the page you were originally trying to view, the page may contain elements that are not supported by the web browser. These include Flash, Shockwave, VBScript,

WMLScript, and other plug-ins.

Some websites use a redirector to their true home page. If the web browser on your smartphone can’t follow the redirector, try using a desktop browser to see the landing page of the redirector, and

•

Your subscription plan includes high-speed data services.

W E B 239

11

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S then enter that address in the web browser on your smartphone.

TIP

Your smartphone can open your email application when you select an email address on a web page. If nothing happens when you select the link, make sure your email application is already set up.

•

If the problem persists on a different web page, you may have a problem with your connection to your wireless service provider network.

3

To be sure there is not a problem with your connection to your wireless service provider network, press and hold

Power/End

to turn off your phone. Then press and hold the same button to turn it back on again.

4

Try opening the web page again to see if it loads faster.

It takes a long time for a web page to load

If it is taking longer than usual to load web pages, you may have traveled from an

EDGE service area to a GPRS service area.

Although GPRS data service is considered a high-speed data service, it seems slow if you are used to EDGE speed.

1

Press

Phone

and look for either of the following icons in the title bar of the

Main tab to confirm that you have a data connection:

.

2

Try opening a different web page to see if the problem persists.

•

If you can open a different web page, it is likely that the original web site is experiencing problems, and the problem is not related to your smartphone.

An image or map is too small on my screen

The web browser has two modes:

Optimized and Wide Page. Optimized

Mode resizes all images and page elements to fit in a single column on the smartphone screen. Switch to Wide Page

Mode to see the full-size image (see

Viewing a web page).

You may also be able to save the image on your smartphone or an expansion card and then view the image later on your computer.

240 W E B


11

A secure site refuses to permit a transaction

Some websites don’t support certain browsers for transactions. Please contact the site’s webmaster to make sure the site allows transactions using Blazer™ web browser from your smartphone.

TIP

Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet in optimum environmental conditions.

Performance and range may be affected by physical obstacles, radio interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors.

My Bluetooth DUN connection isn’t working

Check all of the following:

•

•

•

•

Press

Applications

and select

Bluetooth

. Make sure the

Bluetooth

setting is

On

.

You have already formed a partnership between your smartphone and your computer (see Creating a partnership between your smartphone and your computer).

The Bluetooth feature on your computer is turned on.

Your smartphone is within 30 feet of your computer.

If the problem persists, try the following:

•

•

•

•

Turn the

Bluetooth

setting off and then turn it back on again.

Try moving your smartphone closer to your computer. The effective range for a computer varies between manufacturers.

Confirm that no obstructions, including your body, are between your smartphone and your computer.

If the problem persists, create a new partnership with your computer (see

Creating a partnership between your smartphone and your computer).

W E B 241

11


Camera

Here are some tips for taking good pictures with the built-in camera:

•

•

•

•

•

•

Clean the camera’s lens with a soft, lint-free cloth.

Take pictures in bright lighting conditions. Low-light images may be grainy, due to the sensitivity of the camera.

Hold the smartphone as still as possible. Try supporting your picture-taking arm against your body or a stationary object (such as a wall).

Keep the subject of the picture still.

Exposure time is longer with lower light levels, so you may see a blur.

For best results, verify that you have the brightest light source coming from behind you, lighting the subject’s face.

Avoid taking indoor pictures with the subject in front of a window or light.

Make sure the subject is at least 18 inches away from the camera to ensure good focus.

Remember that when you synchronize your smartphone with your computer, your camera images are stored in the My

Pictures/Palm Photos folder on your hard drive (see Viewing pictures and videos on your computer).

Making room on your smartphone

Keep in mind that your smartphone includes an expansion card slot, and that you can store applications and information on expansion cards (sold separately).

However, you still need free memory on the smartphone itself to run applications from an expansion card. For more info on using expansion cards, see Using expansion cards.

If you store a large number of records or install many third-party applications, the internal memory on your smartphone may fill up. Here are some common ways to clear space:

242 C A M E R A


11

Email:

Messages that have large attachments can quickly consume memory on your smartphone. Delete messages with large attachments. If you have hundreds of messages with or without attachments, you may want to delete older messages to make room (see the

User

Guide for the VersaMail Application

on your computer).

Windows:

Start>Programs>Palm

Mac



in the

Documentation

folder.

Pictures & Videos:

Large images take up a lot of memory. Move images to an expansion card or synchronize them to your computer, and then delete the images from your smartphone (see Viewing pictures and videos on your computer).

Music:

Music files often consume a lot of memory. Move music files to an expansion card, or delete large files from your smartphone.

Messaging:

Multimedia content can also consume a lot of memory. Move multimedia content to an expansion card, or delete large files from your smartphone

(see Deleting messages).

Internet:

If you set a large web browser cache, you may want to use the web browser’s advanced Memory Management settings to clear all recent pages

(see Customizing your web browser settings).

Third-party applications:

You can delete infrequently used applications (see

Removing applications) or move them to an expansion card (see Copying applications between an expansion card and your smartphone).

Third-party applications

Some third-party applications can cause conflicts on your smartphone. For example, third-party applications that were not written with the smartphone keyboard and

5-way navigator in mind may cause strange behavior or errors when using the keyboard

T H I R D - P A R T Y A P P L I C A T I O N S 243

11

C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S and 5-way navigator in these applications.

Third-party applications that modify wireless features may require extra troubleshooting.

If you recently installed an application and your device seems to be stuck, try the following:

1


2

If the problem persists, perform a system reset (see Performing a system reset).

3

Delete the most recently installed application from your smartphone (see

Removing applications).

4

If the problem persists, perform another system reset.

5

If possible, synchronize your smartphone with your computer to back up your most recent info.

6

If you’re unable to perform the preceding steps or the problem persists, locate your

Backup

subfolder on your computer and rename the folder (for example, BackupOld).


Files\Palm\<device name>

Mac: Mac hard drive> : Applications :

Palm : Users : <device name>

NOTE

Can’t find a Palm folder in Program

Files? Then look for a palmOne or

Handspring folder instead. For more info, see I can’t find my user folder.

7

Perform a hard reset (see Performing a hard reset).

8

Sync to restore your info in Calendar,

Contacts, Tasks, Memos, and Pictures

& Videos.

9

If the problem is resolved, begin reinstalling your third-party applications one at a time by double-clicking a single file in the original Backup subfolder that you renamed, and sync after each application you install.

10

If the problem recurs, delete the last application you installed and report the problem to its developer.

244 T H I R D - P A R T Y A P P L I C A T I O N S


11

I can’t exit a game or third-party application

Sometimes you might want to know more about an error. Your smartphone uses a special interface to show error messages

Press

Option

+ to return to Applications View.

in greater detail.

1

Press

Phone

.

Getting more help

Contact the author or vendor of the third-party software if you require further assistance.

Error messages

2

Enter

#*377

.

recent automatic reset.

4

Select

OK

.

, and then press

Send

3

Review the screen with details about the conditions that led up to the most

Your smartphone is designed to minimize interruptions when a system error occurs.

If your smartphone encounters a system error, it automatically resets itself and resumes functioning as normal. If possible, it even turns the phone back on if it was on before the error occurred.

NOTE

Third-party developers create their own error messages. If you do not understand an error message, please contact the developer of the application for help.

E R R O R M E S S A G E S 245

11


246 E R R O R M E S S A G E S

Where to learn more

Whether you’re on the go or at your computer, there are several ways to learn more about using your Palm

® smartphone.

Treo

™

680

Information:

Many dialog boxes have a

Tips icon in the upper-right corner.

Select the

Tips

icon to learn about the tasks you can perform in that dialog box.

Online support from Palm:

For up-to-date downloads, troubleshooting, and support information, go to www.palm.com/ treo680gsm-support.

For a quick introduction

Quick Tour:

The Quick Tour introduces you to many of the features on your Treo 680.

It is already installed on your Treo, and you can open it any time. Press

Applications

, and then select

Quick Tour

.

If you need more information

Books:

Many books on Palm OS ® devices are available in local or online book retailers

(look in the computers section), or visit www.palm.com/treo680gsm.

While using your Treo

Online forums:

Consult online user

On-device User Guide:

A copy of this guide is included right on your smartphone. discussion groups to swap Treo information and learn about Treo topics you

The on-device guide is specially formatted for your smartphone screen. To view the may find nowhere else. Visit www.palm.com/treo680gsm for details.

on-device guide, press

Applications

,

Customer service from your wireless

and then select

My Treo

.

service provider:

For questions about your

Tips:

Many of the built-in applications mobile account or features, contact your wireless service provider.

include helpful tips for getting the most out of your Treo. To view these tips, open an application, press

Menu

,

Options

, and then select

Tips

.

Information for users of Windows Vista

If your computer is running Windows Vista, visit www.palm.com/windowsvista for more information.

W H E R E T O L E A R N M O R E 247

248 W H E R E T O L E A R N M O R E

Terms

Alt (alternative)

A keyboard key. Enter a letter on the keyboard, and then press Alt to access variations such as international characters and symbols.

Applications View

The screen on your Palm

®

Treo

™

680 smartphone from which you can open all applications.

Auto-off interval

The time of inactivity that passes before the screen on your smartphone turns off.

The wireless features on your smartphone are unaffected by this setting.

Beam

The process of sending or receiving an entry or application using the infrared (IR) port on your Treo.

Bluetooth

®

wireless technology

Technology that enables devices such as smartphones, mobile phones, and computers to connect wirelessly to each other so that they can exchange information over short distances. For more info, visit www.bluetooth.com.

CSD (circuit-switched data)

A dial-up Internet connection. You pay for the connection time, not how much information you transfer. Contrast with

GPRS.

Device name

The name associated with your Treo 680 and with the info in your desktop software.

The device name (sometimes called the

username

) distinguishes your Treo 680 from all other Palm OS ® devices. When you first synchronize your Treo 680, you are asked to give it a device name. This name appears in the User list in Palm Desktop software. Every Palm OS device that is synchronized with the same computer must have a unique device name.

Dialog box

A set of options and command buttons that is enclosed by a border and that enables you to carry out a specific task.

T E R M S 249

EDGE (Enhanced Data rates for GSM

Evolution)

An enhanced version of GPRS that delivers data speeds that are up to three times faster than standard GPRS connections.


Favorite

A button that provides quick access to a phone number (speed-dial button) or commonly used application (such as Web or Messaging). You can define an unlimited number of favorite buttons in the Phone application.

GPRS (General Packet Radio Service)

A mobile Internet connectivity technology that allows persistent data connections.


HotSync

®

The technology that synchronizes your Treo and your computer with the simple press of a button.

HotSync manager

The computer application that manages the synchronization of your Treo with your computer.

Infrared (IR)

A way of transmitting information using light waves; this is called

beaming

. The IR port on your Treo enables you to transfer information to other IR devices within a short radius.

Lithium Ion (Li-Ion)

The rechargeable battery technology used in the Treo 680.

MMS (Multimedia Messaging System)

An enhanced form of messaging that enables you to send pictures, videos, animations, sounds, and ringtones almost instantly.

Option key

The keyboard key that enables you to access the alternative feature that appears above the letter on each key.

Palm

®

Desktop software

A PIM application for computers that helps you manage your personal information and keep your personal information synchronized with your Treo.

250 T E R M S

Palm OS

The operating system of your Treo 680.

Palm OS is known for its simplicity of use and for the large number of compatible third-party applications that can be added to your smartphone.

Palm™ Quick Install

The component on your Windows computer that enables you to install Palm

OS applications and other information on your Treo.

Partnership

Two Bluetooth devices—for example, your smartphone and a hands-free device—that can connect because each device finds the same passkey on the other device. Once you form a partnership with a device, you don’t need to enter a passkey to connect with that device again. Partnership is also known as paired relationship, pairing, trusted device, and trusted pair on some devices.

Phone

The application on your Treo 680 that enables you to make and receive phone calls.

PIM (personal information manager)

A genre of software that includes applications such as Palm Desktop software, Microsoft Outlook, Lotus Notes, and ACT!. PIMs generally store contacts, schedules, tasks, and memos.

PIN (personal identification number)

The four-digit password assigned to your

SIM card by your wireless service provider.

Turning on the PIN lock secures your wireless account. See also PUK.

PIN2 (personal identification number 2)

A code that protects certain network settings such as call barring or fixed dialing.

PUK (PIN unlock key)

A special extended password assigned to your SIM card. If you enter the wrong PIN more than three times, your SIM card will be blocked and you must call your wireless service provider for the PUK.

Quick key

A letter that you can press and hold to activate a favorite from any tab in the

Phone app. For example, create a speed-dial button for your mother's number and enter the letter

M

for “Mom”

T E R M S 251

as the Quick Key. Then when you want to call her, go to the Phone app and press and hold M. Your smartphone dials the number.

SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card

The smartcard, inserted in your Treo 680, that contains your mobile account information, such as your phone number and the services to which you subscribe.

Phonebook entries and SMS messages can also be stored on the SIM card.

Slide

A collection of text, pictures, videos, and sounds that are grouped together within a multimedia message created in the

Messaging application. During playback, all the items within a particular slide appear on the same screen. If a multimedia message contains multiple slides, each slide can be viewed separately during playback.

SMS (Short Messaging Service)

The service that exchanges short text messages almost instantly. Text messages are typically sent to a mobile phone number, rather than an email address

(although this too is possible). These messages can usually include up to 160 characters; messages with more than 160 characters are automatically split into several messages. You can send and receive SMS messages while you are on a voice call.

Streaming

Technology that enables you to access media content—for example, watch video or listen to an audio program—directly from the Internet on your smartphone without needing to download a file to save on your smartphone.

User folder

The folder on your computer that contains the information you enter in Palm Desktop software and the information you enter on your smartphone and synchronize with

Palm Desktop software.

252 T E R M S

Important safety and legal information

FCC Statement

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B computer peripheral, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC

Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

The Federal Communications Commission (FCC), Industrie Canada

(IC), and other agencies around the world have established limits that incorporate a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons using this equipment.

In order to certify this unit for sale in the US, Canada and Europe this unit has been tested for RF exposure compliance at a qualified test laboratory and found to comply with the regulations regarding exposure to RF Energy.

SAR was measured with the unit transmitting at its maximum certified RF power. Often, however, during normal operation the unit will transmit much less than maximum power. Transmit power is controlled automatically and, in general is reduced as you get closer to a cellular base station. This reduction in transmit power will result in a lower RF energy exposure and resulting SAR value.

FCC RF Safety Statement

In order to comply with FCC RF exposure safety guidelines, users

MUST use one of the following types of bodyworn accessories.

• A Palm

®

brand body-worn accessory that has been tested for

SAR compliance and is intended for use with this product.

• An accessory that contains NO metal (snaps, clips, etc) and provides AT LEAST 1.5 cm of separation between the users body and the unit.

Do NOT use the device in a manner such that it is in direct contact with the body (i.e. on the lap or in a breast pocket). Such use will likely exceed FCC RF safety exposure limits.

See www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/ for more information on RF exposure safety.

RF Safety Exposure

To Radio Frequency Energy (SAR) Radio transmitting devices radiate

Radio Frequency (RF) energy during its operation. RF energy can be absorbed into the human body and potentially can cause adverse health effects if excessive levels are absorbed. The unit of measurement for human exposure to RF energy is “Specific

Absorption Rate” (SAR).

Responsible party

(North America)

Palm, Inc.

950 W. Maude Ave.

Sunnyvale, CA 94085

USA www.palm.com

(Europe)

Roy Bedlow

Buckhurst Court

London Road

Wokingham, Berkshire RG40 1PA,

UK

I M P O R T A N T S A F E T Y A N D L E G A L I N F O R M A T I O N

253

Declaration of Conformity

We, Palm Inc., declare under sole responsibility that the product:

Model name:

Description:

Treo 680

PDA phone

Is in conformity with the following standards and/or other normative document:

• ETSI EN 301 511

• ETSI EN 301 908-1

• ETSI EN 301 908-2

• ETSI EN 300 328

• ETSI EN 301 489-1/-7/-17/-24

• EN60950-1

• EN 50360

We hereby declare that the above named product is in conformance to all essential requirements of the RTTE

Directive 1999/5/EC.

The conformity assessment procedure referred to Article 10 and detailed in Annex IV of directive 1999/5/EC has been related to Articles:

• R&TTE Article 3.1 (a) Health and Safety

• R&TTE Article 3.1 (b) EMC

• R&TTE Article 3.2 Spectrum Usage

Identification mark: 0984 (Notified Body) CE.

This identification mark is permanently provided on the device label.

The technical documentation relevant to the above equipment will be held at:

Palm Inc.

950 W Maude Avenue

Sunnyvale, CA. 94085

U.S.A.

Person responsible for making this declaration:

David Woo/Sr Compliance Engineer

Sunnyvale/August 31, 2006

254


Antenna Care/Unauthorized Modifications

Use only the supplied integral antenna. Unauthorized antenna modifications or attachments could damage the unit and may violate

FCC regulations. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Potentially Unsafe Areas

Potentially explosive atmospheres: Turn off your smartphone when you are in any areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere, such as fueling areas (gas or petrol stations) or storage facilities for fuel or chemicals.

Specific Absorption Rates (SAR) for Wireless

Smartphones

The SAR is a value that corresponds to the relative amount of RF energy absorbed in the head of a user of a wireless handset.

The SAR value of a smartphone is the result of an extensive testing, measuring and calculation process. It does not represent how much

RF the smartphone emits. All smartphone models are tested at their highest value in strict laboratory settings. But when in operation, the

SAR of a smartphone can be substantially less than the level reported to the FCC. This is because of a variety of factors including its proximity to a base station antenna, smartphone design and other factors. What is important to remember is that each smartphone meets strict federal guidelines. Variations in SARs do not represent a variation in safety.

All smartphones must meet the federal standard, which incorporates a substantial margin of safety. As stated above, variations in SAR values between different model smartphones do not mean variations in safety. SAR values at or below the federal standard of 1.6 W/kg are considered safe for use by the public.

To view the highest reported (FCC) SAR values of the

Palm

®

Treo

™

680 smartphone, visit www.palm.com/38086.

Operational Warnings

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON SAFE AND EFFICIENT

OPERATION. Read this information before using your integrated multi-service portable radio.

For the safe and efficient operation of your radio, observe these guidelines:

Potentially Unsafe Areas/Potentially explosive atmospheres

Obey all signs and instructions regarding turning off your smartphone. In particular, turn off your smartphone when you are in any areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere, such as fueling areas (gas or petrol stations, below deck on boats), storage facilities for fuel or chemicals, blasting areas and areas near electrical blasting caps, and areas where there are chemicals or particles (such as metal powders, grains, and dust) in the air.

Interference to Medical and Personal Electronic Devices

Most but not all electronic equipment is shielded from RF signals and certain electronic equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from your smartphone.

Pacemakers

The Health Industry Manufacturers Association recommends that a minimum separation of six inches (6") be maintained between a smartphone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the independent research by the recommendations of Wireless Technology Research.

Persons with pacemakers should:

• ALWAYS keep the smartphone more than six inches from their pacemaker when the smartphone is turned ON.

• Not carry the smartphone in a breast pocket.

• Use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference.

• Turn the smartphone OFF immediately if you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place.

Audio Safety

Some hearing aids may be affected by some digital smartphones. You may want to consult your doctor in the event of you experience interference with your hearing aid while using your smartphone. When using the speakerphone feature, it is


255

recommended that you place your smartphone at a safe distance from your ear.

Other Medical Devices

If you use any other personal medical device, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information.

Turn your smartphone OFF in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy.

Interference to Other Electronic Devices

RF energy may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic operating and entertainment systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or representative to determine if these systems are adequately shielded from external RF energy. Also check with the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added to the vehicle.

Repetitive Motion Injuries

When using the keyboard or playing games on your smartphone, you may experience discomfort in your neck, shoulders, hands, arms, of other parts of the body. To avoid any injury, such as tendonitis, carpal tunnel syndrome, or other musculoskeletal disorder, make sure to take necessary breaks from use, take longer rests (such as several hours) if discomfort or tiring begins, and see a doctor if discomfort persists.

Blackouts and Seizures

Blinking lights, such as those experienced with television or playing video games, may cause some people to experience blackout or seizure, even if never experienced before. In the event a smartphone user should experience any disorientation, loss of awareness, convulsion, eye or muscle twitching or other involuntary movements, stop use immediately and consult a doctor.

Individuals with personal or family history of such events should consult a doctor before using the device. To limit the possibility of such symptoms, wherever possible every hour take a minimum of 15 minutes, use in a well lighted area, view the screen from the farthest distance and avoid exposure to blinking lights if you are tired.

Aircraft

While in aircraft, follow all instructions regarding the operation of your smartphone. Use of your smartphone while on board on aircraft must be done in accordance in compliance with airline instructions and regulations.

Vehicles with Air Bags

Your smartphone should not be placed in a position that would affect the operation of air bag deployment or in a position that, should the air bag inflate, could propel the smartphone.

Air bags will inflate with great force and care should be taken to protect within a vehicle that has air bags.

Battery

Your smartphone includes an internal lithium ion battery.

Please note that use of certain data applications can result in heavy battery use and may require frequent battery charging. Any disposal of the smartphone must comply with laws and regulations pertaining to lithium ion batteries.

Driving Safety Tips Overview

Always obey all laws and regulations on the use of smartphones in your driving area.

Safety — Your most important call. The Wireless Industry reminds you to use your smartphone safely when driving.

1 Get to know your smartphone and its features, such as speed-dial and redial.

2 When available, use a hands-free device.

3 Position your smartphone within easy reach.

4 Let the person you are speaking to know you are driving; if necessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic or hazardous weather conditions.

5 Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving.

6 Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible, place calls when you are not moving or before pulling into traffic.

7 Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may divert your attention from the road.

8 Dial 9-1-1 to report serious emergencies -it’s free from your smartphone!

9 Use your smartphone to help others in emergencies.

10 Call roadside assistance or a special non-emergency wireless number when necessary.

256


Driving Safety Tips Details

1 Get to know your smartphone and its features such as speed-dial and redial. Carefully read your instruction manual and learn to take advantage of valuable features most smartphones offer including, automatic redial and memory dial-most smartphones can store up to 99 numbers in memory dial. Also, work to memorize the smartphone keypad so you can use the speed-dial function without taking your attention off the road.

2 When available, use a hands-free device. A number of hands-free smartphone accessories are readily available today. Whether you choose an installed mounted device for your smartphone or a speaker phone accessory, take advantage of these devices if available to you.

3 Position your smartphone within easy reach. Make sure you place your smartphone within easy reach and where you can grab it without removing your eyes from the road. If you get an incoming call at an inconvenient time, let your voice mail answer it for you.

4 Suspend conversations during hazardous driving conditions or situations. Let the person you are speaking to know you are driving; if necessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic or hazardous weather conditions. Rain, sleet, snow and ice can be hazardous, but so is heavy traffic. As a driver, your first responsibility is to pay attention to the road.

5 Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving. If you are reading an address book or business card while driving a car, or writing a “to do” list, then you are not watching where you are going. It’s common sense. Don’t get caught in a dangerous situation because you are reading or writing and not paying attention to the road or nearby vehicles.

6 Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible, place calls when you are not moving or before pulling into traffic. Try to plan your calls before you begin your trip, or attempt to coincide your calls with times you may be stopped at a stop sign, red light or otherwise stationary. But if you need to dial while driving, follow this simple tip-dial only a few numbers, check the road and your mirrors, then continue.

7 Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may be distracting. Stressful or emotional conversations and driving do not mix-they are distracting and even dangerous when you are behind the wheel. Make people you are talking with aware you are driving and if necessary, suspend phone conversations which have the potential to divert your attention from the road.

8 Use your smartphone to call for help. Your smartphone is one of the greatest tools you can own to protect yourself and your family in dangerous situations-with your smartphone at your side, help is only three numbers away. Dial 9-1-1 in the case of fire, traffic accident, road hazard, or medical emergencies.

Remember, 9-1-1is a free call on your smartphone!

9 Use your smartphone to help others in emergencies. Your smartphone provides you a perfect opportunity to be a “good

Samaritan” in your community. If you see an auto accident, crime in progress, or other serious emergency where lives are in danger, call 9-1-1, as you would want others to do for you.

10 Call roadside assistance or a special wireless non-emergency assistance number when necessary. Certain situations you encounter while driving may require attention, but are not urgent enough to merit a call to 9-1-1. But you can still use your smartphone to lend a hand. If you see a broken-down vehicle posing no serious hazard, a broken traffic signal, a minor traffic accident where no one appears injured, or a vehicle you know to be stolen, call roadside assistance or other special non-emergency wireless number.

NOTICE FOR CONSUMERS WITH HEARING

DISABILITIES

Digital Wireless Phones to be Compatible with Hearing Aids

On

July 10, 2003, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) modified the exemption for wireless phones under the Hearing Aid

Compatibility Act of 1988. This means that wireless phone manufacturers and service providers must make digital wireless phones accessible to individuals who use hearing aids.

For more information, please go to the FCC’s Consumer Alert on accessibility of digital wireless phones at http://www.fcc.gov/cgb/ consumerfacts/accessiblewireless.html.

Wireless telephones are hand-held phones with built-in antennas, often called cell, mobile, or PCS phones. These phones are popular with callers because they can be carried easily from place to place.


257

Wireless telephones are two-way radios. When you talk into a wireless telephone, it picks up your voice and converts the sound to radio frequency energy (or radio waves). The radio waves travel through the air until they reach a receiver at a nearby base station.

The base station then sends your call through the telephone network until it reaches the person you are calling.

When you receive a call on your wireless telephone, the message travels through the telephone network until it reaches a base station close to your wireless phone. Then the base station sends out radio waves that are detected by a receiver in your telephone, where the signals are changed back into the sound of a voice.

The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Food and

Drug Administration (FDA) each regulate wireless telephones. FCC ensures that all wireless phones sold in the United States follow safety guidelines that limit radio frequency (RF) energy. FDA monitors the health effects of wireless telephones. Each agency has the authority to take action if a wireless phone produces hazardous levels of RF energy.

FDA derives its authority to regulate wireless telephones from the

Radiation Control provisions of the Federal Food, Drug, and Cosmetic

Act (originally enacted as the Radiation Control for Health and Safety

Act of 1968). [http://www.fda.gov/cdrh/comp/eprc.html].

FCC derives its authority to regulate wireless telephones from the

National Environmental Policy Act of 1969 (NEPA) and the

Telecommunications Act of 1996 http://www.fcc.gov/telecom.html]. Updated 7/16/2003

Hands-Free Capability

All CTIA Certified portable products provide the consumer with a toll-free number for the purchase of a compatible hands-free device. 1-800-881-7256

STATIC ELECTRICITY, ESD, AND YOUR PALM DEVICE

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to electronic devices if discharged into the device, so you should take steps to avoid such an occurrence.

Description of ESD

Static electricity is an electrical charge caused by the buildup of excess electrons on the surface of a material. To most people, static electricity and ESD are nothing more than annoyances. For example, after walking over a carpet while scuffing your feet, building up electrons on your body, you may get a shock— the discharge event—when you touch a metal doorknob. This little shock discharges the built-up static electricity.

ESD-susceptible equipment

Even a small amount of ESD can harm circuitry, so when working with electronic devices, take measures to help protect your electronic devices, including your

Palm

®

device, from ESD harm. While Palm has built protections against ESD into its products, ESD unfortunately exists and, unless neutralized, could build up to levels that could harm your equipment.

Any electronic device that contains an external entry point for plugging in anything from cables to docking stations is susceptible to entry of ESD. Devices that you carry with you, such as your Palm device, build up ESD in a unique way because the static electricity that may have built up on your body is automatically passed to the device. Then, when the device is connected to another device such as a docking station, a discharge event can occur.

Precautions against ESD

Make sure to discharge any built-up static electricity from yourself and your electronic devices

before

touching an electronic device or connecting one device to another.

The recommendation from Palm is that you take this precaution before connecting your Palm device to your computer, placing the device in a cradle, or connecting it to any other device. You can do this in many ways, including the following:

• Ground yourself when you’re holding your device by simultaneously touching a metal surface that is at earth ground.

For example, if your computer has a metal case and is plugged

258


into a standard three-prong grounded outlet, touching the case should discharge the ESD on your body.

• Increase the relative humidity of your environment.

• Install ESD-specific prevention items, such as grounding mats.

Conditions that enhance ESD occurrences

Conditions that can contribute to the buildup of static electricity in the environment include the following:

• Low relative humidity.

• Material type (The type of material gathering the charge. For example, synthetics are more prone to static buildup than natural fibers like cotton.)

• The rapidity with which you touch, connect, or disconnect electronic devices.

While you should always take appropriate precautions to discharge

0ectricity, if you are in an environment where you notice ESD events, you may want to take extra precautions to protect your electronic equipment against ESD.

Precaution against hearing loss Protect your hearing. Listening to this device at full volume for a long period of time can damage your hearing.

A pleine puissance, l'écoute prolongée du baladeur peut endommager l'oreille de l'utilisateur. Consultez notre site web www.palm.com/fr pour plus d'informations.

Waste disposal Please recycle appropriately. For appropriate recycling and disposal instructions please visit: www.palm.com/environment.

Précautions d'usage de votre téléphone mobile

Le taux de DAS(1) (Débit d’Absorption Spécifique) de votre Palm

Treo 680 smartphone est 0.741 w/kg.

Conseils d'utilisation pour réduire le niveau d'exposition aux rayonnements : Utiliser le plus souvent possible les kits piétons

(oreillettes), notamment en cas d'usage fréquent ou prolongé du téléphone mobile Ils apportent en outre un plus grand confort d’utilisation.

Eloigner le téléphone mobile de certaines zones sensibles telles que le ventre chez les femmes enceintes ou le bas-ventre chez les adolescents, plus particulièrement lors d’une communication.

Utiliser votre téléphone mobile dans de bonnes conditions de réception. Celle-ci est indiquée sur l’écran de votre téléphone par la matérialisation de barrettes. A partir de 3 ou 4 barrettes, la réception est de bonne qualité pour passer vos communications. Ce n'est pas toujours le cas dans certaines zones ou situations, notamment les parking souterrains, les ascenseurs, en train ou en voiture ou tout simplement dans un secteur mal couvert par le réseau.

Mesures touchant à la sécurité : Dans certains lieux ou situations, tels que les avions, les hôpitaux, les stations-service et les garages professionnels, l'usage du téléphone est interdit. Il est donc impératif de respecter strictement les consignes de sécurité propres à chacune de ces situations et d’éteindre votre téléphone lorsque cela est requis.

Par ailleurs pour éviter les risques d’interférences, les personnes porteuses d’implants électroniques (stimulateurs cardiaques, pompes à insuline, neurostimulateurs..) doivent conserver une distance de 15 cm entre le mobile et l’implant et ne l’utiliser que du côté opposé au côté où celui-ci est situé.

Téléphoner en conduisant, même avec des équipements qui ne sont pas interdits par la réglementation, est dangereux car il augmente potentiellement le risque d’accident provenant de la distraction créée par la conversation elle même. Aussi, est-il recommandé de ne jamais téléphoner en conduisant et de considérer que l’utilisation d’un kit mains-libres n’est pas une solution.

(1) Valeur DAS la plus élevée pour ce modèle de téléphone et pour une utilisation à l’oreille, communiquée par le constructeur. Le DAS, exprimé en w/kg, quantifie le niveau d’exposition aux ondes

électromagnétiques et permet de vérifier la conformité des mobiles à la réglementation française et européenne qui impose que celui-ci soit inférieur à 2w/kg.


259

260


Specifications

Radio

Phone features

Processor technology

Expansion

Battery

Palm OS

Camera

Size

Weight

®

version

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

GSM 850/900/1800/1900 quad band world phone

GPRS class 10, class B

EDGE up to 59kbps per time-slot

Supports CSD (circuit-switched data)

Speakerphone

Hands-free headset jack (2.5mm, 3 or 4-barrel connector)

Microphone mute option

TTY/TDD compatible

6-way calling

Intel PXA270 Bulverde processor, 312MHz

SD/MultiMediaCard/SDIO card slot

•

•

1200mAH, rechargeable lithium ion

Removable for replacement

Palm OS 5.4.9

•

•

•

•

Still image capture resolution (640 x 480)

2x digital zoom

Video capture resolution (320 x 240)

Automatic light balance

4.44 in. x 2.33 in. x 0.84 in. (112.9mm x 59.3mm x 22.4mm)

5.6 ounces (157 grams)

S P E C I F I C A T I O N S

261

Connectivity

Display

Keyboard

Included software

System requirements

Operating and storage temperature range

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

IR

Bluetooth ® wireless technology (1.2 compliant)

Touch-sensitive LCD screen (includes stylus)

65,536 colors (16-bit color)

User-adjustable brightness

320 x 320 resolution

Built-in QWERTY keyboard plus 5-way navigator

Backlight for low lighting conditions

Phone (including Favorites and Dial Pad)

Pictures & Videos

(includes camera and camcorder)

Messaging (text and multimedia)

Blazer ® web browser

(Internet)

Pocket Tunes™

VersaMail ® (email)

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Contacts

Calendar

Memos

Tasks

Voice Memo

Documents To Go

Professional ®

Calculator Basic and

Advanced

World Clock

Palm

®

Desktop software

Windows 2000 or XP with USB port

Mac OS 10.2 –10.3 with USB port

Later versions may also be supported

32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C)

5% to 90% relative humidity (RH)

262



263

264


Index

SYMBOLS

! in Tasks list 162

NUMERICS

112 calls 82, 207

24-hour clock 201

3G2 files 138, 142

3GP files 138

5-way navigator accessing applications and

42 accessing command buttons and 35 answering phone calls and

207 entering alternate characters and 39 highlighting and selecting items and 34 location of 13 moving around screen and

33 navigating pick lists and 36 scrolling web pages and

116 selecting menu items and

35

A

AC charger 17, 18 accented characters 39, 40 accessing

Alert dialog box 173 alternate character list 40 application menus 35 applications 42, 43

Applications View 41 calculator 174

Call Log 53 camera 133 command buttons 35

Compose dialog box 101,

103 corporate servers 215

Dial Pad 57 email 87–101, 214

Favorites pages 51 files 167, 214

HotSync manager 185 information 208 items on expansion cards

193 items on pick lists 36 music player 145 on-device documentation

247

Palm online support 247

Pocket Tunes 146

Quick Tour 247 secure websites 115,

116, 241 voicemail 55 web browser 42, 116 web pages 115, 117, 239

World Clock 159 accessories 13

Account Name field 89

Account Setup command 90

Account Setup dialog box 89,

90 accounts

See also

email accounts call forwarding and 61 conference calls and 60 corporate mail servers and

214 customer service support for 247 setting preferences for 97 voicemail and 54

Accounts command 96

Acrobat files 167 activating items on screen 34

I N D E X 265

266 I N D E X

Active Call View screen 56,

58, 74 active calls.

See

phone calls

Add Bookmark command

117

Add Call button 57

Add Contact command 59

Add New Number dialog box

58

Add New Number prompt 58

Add Song button 148

Add to album command 140 adding accessories 13 additional security 211 attachments 92–93

Bluetooth devices 72–74,

128 bookmarks 117 business cards 66 caller ID photos 64, 65 captions to photos 134,

141 categories for applications

203 cities to World Clock 159 contacts 63 email addresses 91 emoticons 102 events 152, 153 favorite buttons 67–69 hands-free devices 70, 74 memos 169 partnerships 73, 124 passwords 209, 210 phone numbers 58 photos to albums 140 playlists 147, 148 private entries 210

QuickText phrases 102 signatures 100 tasks 160 videos to albums 140 voice memos 169 wallpaper 141

Address Bar 116 addresses adding multiple recipients

69, 101 assigning to favorite buttons 69 highlighting email 34 multimedia messages and

103 sending email and 91 synchronizing 231 text messages and 101,

105 viewing website 121, 122 web links and 115 adjusting screen brightness

56, 200, 214 adjusting volume alarm tones 157 music 147 phone calls 21, 78 ringer 78 video clips 136 voice memos 170

Advanced Mode (calculator)

174, 175

Advanced Mode command

174 agenda lists 151

Agenda View 79, 151, 156

Alarm check box 153 alarm clock 160

Alarm Preferences command

160

Alarm Sound pick list 158,

163 alarm tones 157 alarms

See also

alerts adding to calendar 153,

157 adding to tasks 161, 163

recording sounds for 158 setting for clock 160

Album command 140

Album list 137, 139, 141 albums.

See

photo albums; video albums

Alert dialog box 55, 105, 173 alert icon 83

Alert Sound pick list 98 alert tones 77, 98, 110 alerts

See also

alarms clearing 174 displaying 173 message text in 109 receiving messages and

98, 105 responding to 55, 105,

226 voicemail and 55 aligning the screen 202

Alt key 39, 249 alternate characters 39, 40 alternate characters list 40 anniversaries 154

Answer button 54 answering phone calls 53 antenna 255 applets 115 application categories 43 application list view 203

Application pick list 199 application preferences 204,

205 applications

See also

specific built-in applications accessing 42, 43 associating with buttons

69, 204 beaming 184 categorizing 203 caution for 194, 219 changing screen fonts for

200 closing 41 copying 194 copying text to 121 customizing 203–204 deleting 25, 178, 179, 243 displaying 203 downloading 119, 177 getting help with 178 installing 176–177, 219 opening 13, 41, 42, 58,

193 playing music and 147 running on expansion cards 242 searching in 173 sending over Bluetooth devices 181 setting default 205 switching 57 synchronizing 29, 185 transferring 23, 25, 181,

184, 194 troubleshooting 219 viewing information about

179–180 viewing menus for 35 viewing tips for 247

Applications button 13, 41,

43, 47

Applications View accessing 41 accessing items on expansion cards and

193 copying applications from

194 defined 249 displaying applications in

203 opening applications and

41

I N D E X 267

268 I N D E X overview 42–43 applications, exiting 245 appointments 152, 232

See also

events

Archive folder 178 area codes 80 area conversions 175 arrow icons 33

ASF files 138

Ask to add unknown phone numbers option 58, 66

Attach image option 103

Attach ringtone option 104

Attach Signature check box

100

Attach voice memo option

104 attachments adding 92–93 displaying 94 downloading 95 multimedia messages and

103 multiple files and 92 opening 167 pictures as 92, 134 removing 92 storing large 243 supported formats for 167 video clips as 92, 136 voice memos as 170 attendee information 154 audio 199, 255

See also

multimedia messages; music; voice memos audio adapter 71

Audio Caption command 134 audio captions adding 134, 141 background music and

139 playing 138

Audio icon 138

Auto answer pick list 75

Auto Lock Device box 209

Auto naming pick list 136

Auto Sync dialog box 97 auto sync failures 98

Auto-complete check box

122

Auto-hide Toolbar option 139

Auto-Keyguard pick list 206 automated voicemail systems 54

Auto-off After pick list 214 auto-off interval 249

AVI files 138

B

back icon (browser) 117

Background check box 156 background music 139 backgrounds 79, 156 backing up information 24,

29, 223 backlight (keyboard) 38, 200,

214

Backlight button 200

Backspace key 37

Backup folder 179, 220

Basic Mode (calculator) 174

Basic Mode command 174 basics 247 battery charging 17–19 displaying remaining power on 84 disposing of 225, 256 inserting 16 maximizing life of 19, 213 removing 224 replacing 20, 223–225 viewing status of 19 battery consumption 20 battery door release 14 battery icon 19, 83

Beam Business Card command 67

Beam Category command

183

Beam command 183, 184

Beam From pick list 184

Beam Receive pick list 214

Beam Status dialog box 183,

184 beaming battery life and 20 defined 249 overview 182–184 troubleshooting 183, 185 turning off 214 bell 83, 173, 226 birthdays 154 blank screens 225 blank text messages 101 blank time slots 156

Blazer application 115

See also

web browser blinking bell 83, 173, 226

Bluetooth adapter 124, 125

Bluetooth application opening 72 sending from 181 setting up connections with 128, 129, 187 setting up dial-up networking and 126 visibility options in 181,

188

Bluetooth devices connecting to 72, 127–

130, 187 disabling or enabling 20,

74, 181 entering passkeys for 128,

129, 130 optimal range for 72 receiving information from

181 receiving phone calls and

56, 74, 235 sending over 180, 181 setting up 72–74 synchronizing over 187,

189, 227 troubleshooting 235, 236,

241 visibility options for 129,

181

Bluetooth icon 72, 84

Bluetooth icons (Phone application) 83

Bluetooth network icon 126

Bluetooth wireless technology 124, 249

BMP files 137 bonus software.

See

built-in applications

Bookmark Page icon 119 bookmarks 117–119, 183

Bookmarks View 118, 119

Bookmarks View icon 118 border glow (highlight) 34 brightness (screen) 20, 56,

200, 214 brightness duration

(backlight) 200, 214

Brightness slider 214 browsing files 193 browsing the web.

See

web browsing built-in applications 176, 178,

247

See also

applications; specific application built-in camera.

See

camera built-in security software 205 business cards 66, 183 buttons

See also

favorite buttons

5-way navigator 33 accessing command 35

I N D E X 269

270 I N D E X changing defaults for customizing disabling

204

204

57, 207

204 highlighted on screen 34 restoring factory defaults

204 speed-dialing with 51, 68–

69 web browsing and 117

Buttons Preferences screen

C

cache 123, 243

Calc button 174 calculating disk space 24 calculator 39, 174

Calculator application 174–

175 calculator modes 174 calendar

See also

Calendar application customizing 156–157 deleting events from 155 displaying 151 saving 106 scheduling events for 152,

153, 154 selecting alarm tones for

157 selecting specific dates on

151 viewing tasks on 156

Calendar application changing fonts for 200 changing views for 151 color-coding events 155 creating events with 152,

153, 154 displaying events 79 opening 42, 79 overview 151 setting alarms from 153 setting default view for

156 setting display options in

156–157 synchronizing information in 29

Calendar button 13, 41, 42,

151

Calendar views 151, 156

Call Barring command 78

Call Barring preferences 78 call forwarding 61–62 call forwarding icon 82

Call Log screen 53, 59

Call Preferences command

61

Call Preferences dialog box

61, 62

Call Totals dialog box 62 call waiting 60

Call Waiting dialog box 60 caller IDs 64, 65 calls.

See

phone calls camcorder 134, 135, 136 camcorder buttons 135

Camcorder View 136, 141 camera 133, 136, 242 camera buttons 134

Camera icon 133, 134 camera lens 14

Camera View 136, 141 cancelling menu selection 35

Caps Lock mode 38 captions.

See

audio captions; voice captions

Card category 193

Card Info application 195–

196

Card Info button 195 card readers 145 carrying cases 235 cascading style sheets 117,

123

categories adding ringtones for 66 applications and 43, 203 beaming and 183 color-coding in 155 contacts and 64, 66 creating 203 events and 155, 156 memos and 169 naming 203 receiving from Bluetooth and 182 tasks and 161, 162, 163

Category command 203 category marker 156

Category pick list 156, 157,

203

CDs 145 cell phones.

See

wireless phones

Center button 13 certificates 115 changing bookmarks 118 button defaults 204 contact information 64 default applications 205 email accounts 96 events 155 favorite buttons 70 information 22 owner information 212 passwords 210, 211 personal IDs 208 playlists 148

QuickText phrases 102 screen fonts 200 synchronization defaults

185, 186, 187, 196 synchronization software

230 web page layouts 116 character entry 38, 40

See also

text character limits memos 168 text messages 101 character searches 173 charge indicator 13, 18, 19 charger cable 18 charging smartphone 17, 18, 20 smartphone battery 17–19 charging status 19 chat icon 108, 111

Chat page (Preferences) 109 chat sessions 107, 108, 109

Chat view 107

Choose song button 147

Choose Songs command

148 circuit-switched data connections 249 city information 159, 213

City pick list 159

Clear Cache button 123

Clear Cookies button 123 clock 158, 201

See also

World Clock closing application menus 35 applications 41 pick lists 36 closing applications 245 color palette 136 color preferences 109, 136,

202

Color Theme Preferences screen 202 color-coded category marker

156 color-coding events 155 colored backgrounds 34 command buttons 35 commands.

See

menu items completed tasks 161, 162,

163

I N D E X 271

272 I N D E X completion dates 163 components (smartphone) 8

Compose dialog box 101,

102, 103

Compress Day View check box 156 compressed files 176, 177 computers connecting smartphone to

22, 27 creating partnerships for

124 downloading applications to 177 installing applications from

177, 221 installing synchronization software on 26 quarantined files on 24,

26, 219 setting up DUN connections for 125 synchronizing with 23, 29 transferring information to

29 transferring multimedia to

142 transferring music from

144, 145–146

Con button (calculator) 175

Conduit Settings command

186 conduits 152, 231

Conference button 60 conference calls 60–61

Confirm message deletion check box 109 conflicting applications 24,

194, 219 conflicting events 156

Connect Bluetooth command 74 connecting headsets 70–71 to Bluetooth devices 72,

127–130 to personal computers 22,

27 to virtual private networks

214 to voicemail system 55 to websites 115, 116, 124 connection icons (browser)

116 connections dial-up networking and

124, 126 messaging preferences for 110 precautions for 258 receiving over Bluetooth

181 restrictions for 57 sending over Bluetooth

180, 181 setting up Bluetooth 187 setting up smartphone 22 synchronizing over

Bluetooth 187, 189 synchronizing over infrared 190–191 troubleshooting 55, 234,

238, 241 unsupported 127 viewing status of 82, 116,

126, 237, 238 constants 175 consumption factors (battery)

20

Contact Edit dialog box 64 contact names 50 contacts

See also

Contacts application adding photos to 141

adding speed-dial buttons for 68 assigning caller IDs to 65,

66 copying 67 creating 63 customizing 66 deleting 66 displaying 64 editing 64 entering phone numbers for 58, 79 importing 64 looking up 68 marking as private 64 reordering 63 saving 106 searching for 50, 64, 79 viewing details about 51

Contacts application 63 adding events to 154 changing fonts for 200 synchronizing information in 29

Contacts list 34, 63, 66 contracts 7 conversion functions

(calculator) 174, 175 cookies 115, 122, 123

Copy button 140, 194

Copy command 121, 194

Copy Items dialog box 140

Copy items to pick list 140

Copy to command 140

Copy To pick list 194 copying applications 194 contact information 67 multimedia files 142, 145 music files 144 phone numbers 49, 121 photos 139 text 121 user folders 220 videos 139 copyrighted materials 139 corporate email accounts

214 corporate servers 29, 214 country-specific preferences.

See

language settings coupling 234 coverage area 20, 82, 233 coverage area alerts 78

Coverage in/out pick list 78 crashes 226

Create chats from messages pick list 109

Create new messages as pick list 109 creating albums 140 audio captions 134, 141 bookmarks 117 business cards 66 caller ID photos 64, 65 categories for applications

203 chat sessions 108, 109 cities for World Clock 159 contacts 63 email messages 91, 115 events 152, 153 memos 169 multimedia messages 103 partnerships 73, 124 passwords 209, 210 playlists 147, 148 private entries 210

QuickText phrases 102 signatures 100 speed-dial buttons 68–69 tasks 160 text messages 101–104 voice memos 169 wallpaper 141

I N D E X 273

274 I N D E X

CSD (circuit-switched data)

249 current date and time 158 current events 79

Current Privacy pick list 210,

211 customer service (Palm) 247 customizing applications 203–204 buttons 204 calendar 156–157 camera 136 chat sessions 109 contacts 66 email 97–100

Keyguard 206 messaging options 108 smartphone 157, 197 system date and time 212 system sounds 199–200 tasks 163 web browser 122–124

D

daily events 151

Daily Repeating Events check box 157 daily schedules 151 data.

See

information data service icons 237, 238 data services 87, 115 data transfer 7, 82 databases 173

Date & Time Preferences screen 153, 212 date formats 201 date preferences 212

Date stamp pick list 136 dates adding to photos 136 changing event 155 completed tasks and 162,

163 displaying 151, 158 selecting 151 setting 161, 212 sorting on 107 synchronizing 212 viewing due 162, 163 datestamps 136

Day View 151, 156 daylight savings 159, 160

Daylight Savings Time check box 160 decimal display formats

(calculator) 175 decimal values 175, 201 decompression utilities 177

Default Alarm pick list 158

Default Apps Preferences screen 205 default settings 204

Default View pick list 79, 156 degrees 175 delays 209, 237, 238

Delete command 96, 141,

179 delete confirmation messages 109

Delete Contact command 66

Delete events older than pick list 155

Delete From pick list 179

Delete Memo command 169

Delete Old command 96

Delete Task command 163 deleting albums 140, 141 alerts 174 applications 25, 178, 179,

243 attachments 92 bookmarks 118 contacts 66 cookies 123 device names 25 email 96, 243

events 155 favorite buttons 70 files 243 memos 169 messages 107, 109 music from playlists 148 passwords 210 photos 134, 140, 142 playlists 148 tasks 163 video clips 135, 140, 142 desktop software.

See

Palm

Desktop software

Details button 35

Details command 141

Device Name field 73, 182 device names

Bluetooth devices and 73,

182, 188 defined 249 entering 25, 226 devices

See also

Bluetooth devices; hands-free devices; smartphone entering passkeys and 73 radio frequency emissions and 253, 256 synchronization and 230 upgrades and 23, 68, 229

Dial another call prompt 59

Dial button 52

Dial Extra Digits

Automatically option 69

Dial Number dialog box 52

Dial Pad 39, 49

Dial Pad button 57

Dial Preferences screen 80 dial text 126 dialog boxes accessing command buttons on 35 defined 249 getting help with 247 highlighted buttons in 34 dial-up networking 83, 124–

127, 241 digital cameras 137

See also

camera dimmed images 225 dimming keyboard backlight

200, 214 dimming the touchscreen 42

Disable cookies check box

122

Disable JavaScript check box

122 disabling

Add New Number prompt

58

Bluetooth devices 20, 74 cookies 122

Keyguard 47, 206 onscreen buttons 57, 207

Phone Lock settings 208 system sounds 199 the touchscreen 206 touch-sensitive features

207 web page images 117,

123 disconnecting sync cable 30 discovery 127, 128, 182

Discovery icon 128

Discovery Results list 128,

181 discussion groups 247 disk space (smartphone) 23,

24, 242

Display my name in chat window as entry field 109

Display Options command

156

Display Options dialog box

156

I N D E X 275

276 I N D E X displaying alerts 173 alternate characters 40 application information

179–180 application menus 35 applications 203 attachments 94 available disk space 24 bookmarks 118 connection status 82, 116,

126, 237, 238 contact information 51, 64 current date and time 158 due dates 162, 163 email messages 93, 94 error messages 245 event categories 156 events 79, 151, 156, 157 favorite buttons 51 items in pick lists 36 multimedia messages 106 overdue tasks 151 personal calendar 151 photos 136, 137, 142 private entries 211

Quick Tour documentation

247 signal strength 82 slide shows 138 tasks 156, 162, 163 unread messages 84,

151, 156 video clips 136, 138, 142 video recording time 134 voicemail messages 83 web addresses 122 web pages 115, 117

DOC files 167 documentation 8, 9, 33, 247

Documents application 167–

168

Documents button 168

Documents To Go application

167

Documents To Go icon 168

Down button (navigator) 34,

35, 36 downloading applications 119, 177 attachments 95 email messages 97 files 119, 137, 176 multimedia messages 110

Palm-specific information and updates 247 ringtones 76 text messages 104

Downloads bookmark 120 drafts 92, 102

Drafts button 92 drained battery icon 19 draining the battery 17, 19

Draw on command 134 drivers 190 driving safety tips 256

Due Date pick list 161 due dates 161, 163

DUN (dial-up networking) connections 83, 124–127,

241

E

earpiece 13 eBooks 25 echoes 234

EDGE connections 82, 250 troubleshooting 238, 240

Edit Bookmark List dialog box

119

Edit Bookmarks command

118, 119

Edit Category screen 66

Edit Favorite command 70

Edit Location dialog box 213

Edit Playlist dialog box 148 edit screens 35

editing. See changing

Effects pick list 136 electrostatic discharge 258 email accessing 87–101, 214 adding multiple recipients to 69, 101 adding signatures 100 attaching photos to 92,

134, 139 attaching ringtones 93 attaching videos to 92,

136, 139 attaching voice memos to

170 checking 84 creating 91, 115 customizing 97–100 defining favorite buttons for 69 deleting 96, 243 dialing from 52 downloading 97 forwarding 94 opening attachments for

167 removing attachments for

92 replying to 94 requirements for 7 resending 92 restrictions for 58 retrieving 84, 93 scrolling 94 selecting default application for 205 sending 92, 105, 115 setting alerts for 98 sort options for 95 storing attachments 243 troubleshooting 237 viewing attachments 94 viewing status of 95 viewing unread messages for 84, 151, 156 email accounts changing 96 setting email preferences and 97 setting up 87, 89, 90, 100 email application 87 email applications 63, 240

Email icon 89 email options 91, 95 email providers 88 emergency calls 82, 207 emoticons 102 empty battery icon 19 empty time slots 156 emptying Trash folder 96

Enable background play check box 147

Enable Fixed Number Dialing check box 208 encryption 115

Eng(x) display format 175 engineering notation 175 entering alternate characters 39, 40 decimal values 175, 201 device names 25, 226 email addresses 91 events 152, 153, 154 information 22 lock codes 207 numbers 38, 174 owner preferences 212 passkeys 72, 73, 125, 128 passwords 55, 209, 210 phone numbers 49–52,

62, 66, 79 tasks 160 text 38, 169

URLs 116, 122 web addresses 117 entry fields 180 envelope icon 96

I N D E X 277

278 I N D E X erasing information 226 error messages 245 errors 229, 235, 245

Escalate ring tone volume check box 76

ESD (electrostatic discharge)

258 event conflicts 156

Event Details dialog box 153,

154, 155 events changing 155 color-coding 155 creating 152, 153 deleting 155 displaying 79, 151, 156,

157 incorrect time zones and

232 scheduling repeating 154 setting alarms for 153,

157 setting preferences for

153 synchronizing 151 troubleshooting 232–233 viewing categories of 156 viewing duration of 156

Excel spreadsheets 85, 93,

167

Exchange ActiveSync 100

Exchange Address Book 231

Exchange Servers 100, 151 exiting applications 245 expansion card slot 191, 192 expansion cards accessing items on 193 caution for 24, 194, 195 copying to 139, 144, 194,

195 deleting applications on

178 displaying photo or video albums on 137 downloading to 119 formatting 195 inserting 192 installing applications on

178 managing files on 193 moving files to 25 opening items on 168,

193, 242 removing 193 renaming 195 sending attachments to 95 storing information on 24,

171, 191 transferring applications from 194 viewing information about

195 extensions (phone) 57, 69 extra digits button (Active

Call View) 57

Extra Digits option (New

Favorites) 69

Extract Call button 61

F

factory-installed applications

178 fade setting 156

Fast mode (browser) 123

Fast mode icon 117 favorite buttons adding 67–69 defined 250 deleting 70 dialing with 51 displaying 51 editing 70 organizing 70 transferring to smartphone

68

Favorites tab 51

FCC Statement 253

FDN list 208 features (smartphone) 7, 13–

14 feedback 234 fields 36 file types 103, 120, 137, 138 files accessing 167, 214 attaching to email 92, 93 browsing 193 checking size of 180 deleting 243 downloading 119, 137,

176 incompatible applications and 24, 26 moving to expansion cards

25, 243 opening 167, 168 saving 168 streaming 120 transferring to smartphone

23, 167

Files application 193 financial calculator 174 financial functions 175

Find dialog box 173

Find More button 173

Find Text on Page command

121 finding chat sessions 108 contacts 50, 64, 79 specific characters 173 text 121, 173 firewalls 214

5-way navigator accessing applications and

42 accessing command buttons and 35 answering phone calls and

207 entering alternate characters and 39 highlighting and selecting items and 34 location of 13 moving around screen and

33 navigating pick lists and 36 scrolling web pages and

116 selecting menu items and

35

Fixed display format 175 fixed number dialing 208 flight mode 48

Float display format 175 folder pick list 96 folders accessing 231 locating 24, 227 removing messages from

107 sorting messages in 107 switching between email

96

Font command 116, 200 font size 116, 201

Font size pick list 201 fonts 200 forgetting passwords 209,

211

Format Card command 196

Formats Preferences screen

201

Formats tab 201 formatting expansion cards

195 forums 247

Forward all calls pick list 61,

62 forward icon (browser) 117

I N D E X 279

280 I N D E X forwarding email 94 phone calls 61–62 free disk space, determining

24 freeing disk space 24, 242 freeing memory 123, 178,

242 freezes 219, 222

From pick list 194 full charge (battery) 17

G

Game Volume pick list 200

General Packet Radio Service

(GPRS) technology 250 getting started 9, 11, 21, 247

GIF files 137

Glossary 249 glow (highlight) 34

GPRS connections 82, 238,

240, 250

GPRS technology 250

GPS receivers 130 gradients 175 graphics.

See

images grouping photos or videos

138 groupware 100

H

hands-free devices adding 70, 74 checking status of 83 connecting to 72, 127 disabling or enabling 56 entering passkeys for 73 finding compatible 71 passkeys and 73 purchasing 258 receiving phone calls and

74, 75 restrictions for 71 switching between 75 tips for 256 troubleshooting 235–236

Hands-free Preferences screen 75

Hands-free Setup button 73 hanging up phone 57, 59, 61 hard resets 209, 222 hardware 8 headphones 71, 142 headset button 54, 56, 71 headset jack 14 headsets

See also

hands-free devices connecting to smartphone

70–71 entering passkeys for 130 receiving phone calls and

54, 56, 57 restrictions for 71 hearing-impaired 255, 257 help 217, 245, 247 hexadecimal characters 175

Hide Records option 210 hiding blank time slots 156

Pictures & Videos toolbar

139 private entries 210 web browser toolbar 121

High Priority command 104 highlighted buttons 34 highlighting applications 42, 43 favorite buttons 51 items in pick lists 36 items on screen 34 menu items 35 phone numbers 52 text 34, 35, 121 web links 34, 116 hints 209

History command 121

History list 121

Hold button 56 holidays 154 home city 159 home page 122 home page icon 117, 122

HotSync Log 229

HotSync manager 185, 189,

190, 250

HotSync manager icon 185,

228

HotSync Setup button 188

HotSync technology 250 hypertext links.

See

web links

I

icons 82, 146, 203

Ignore button 54

Ignore with Text button 54 image files 103, 120, 137 images

See also

photos; pictures dimmed 225 disabling web page 117,

123 downloading 120 saving 120 selecting as wallpaper 79 sending 103 storing 243 transferring to expansion cards 25, 243 troubleshooting 240

Import from SIM command

64 importing contact information 64 phone numbers 161 inactivity 209, 214, 225

Inbox 34, 93, 111

Inbox icons 95

Incoming dialog box 98 incoming messages 111 incoming phone calls 53, 60,

75, 207 incompatible applications 24,

194, 219

Incompatible Apps directory

24 indicator light 13, 18, 19

Info command 24, 179

Info screens 179 information accessing 208 backing up 24, 29, 223 beaming 183 changing 22 entering 22, 38–39 erasing all 226 hard resets and 209, 222 losing 195, 209, 223 marking as private 210–

211 masking 206, 210 protecting 205, 208 receiving 181, 184 sending over Bluetooth devices 180 storing 24, 171, 191, 242 synchronizing 23, 26, 29,

185 transferring 23, 29, 182 updating 23, 29, 171 infrared port beaming from 183, 184 defined 250 location of 15 synchronizing with 190,

227 inserting battery 16

SIM card 15 installer 176 installing applications 176–177, 219 bonus software 30, 176

I N D E X 281

282 I N D E X

Palm Desktop software

24, 177, 221 synchronization software

26–27 third-party applications

242

VPN client software 215 interference 234, 236 international characters.

See

alternate characters international clock.

See

World Clock international settings.

See

language settings

Internet 113, 137, 176, 238

See also

web browsing; websites interruptions 245

Into album pick list 140 invalid characters 102

IR communications 182

IR port beaming from 183, 184 defined 250 location of 15 synchronizing with 190,

227 items in pick lists 36 items on screen activating 34 highlighting 34 selecting 34 iTunes 142, 144, 146

J

Java applets 115

JavaScript elements 122

JPEG formats 142

JPG files 137

K

key terms.

See

Glossary keyboard accessing alternate characters on 38 dialing with 50 entering information from

38–39 illustrated 37 incremental searches from 50, 79 locking 47, 206 restoring factory defaults

204 keyboard backlight 38, 200,

214

Keyguard 206–207

Keyguard Preferences screen 206, 207

Known Caller pick list 76

L

Label color pick list 109 land lines 54 language selection screen

17, 27 language settings 17, 201,

221 laptops 189, 190 large attachments 243

Left button (navigator) 34,

35, 36 length functions 175 liability ii lightning bolts 19, 83

Li-Ion battery 250

See also

battery links 105

See also

web links

List By option 66 list screens 34, 35

See also

pick lists list view (applications) 203 listening to music 71, 142, 146 voice captions 138

voice memos 170 voicemail 55

Lithium Ion battery 250

See also

battery

Local button 189 locating chat sessions 108 contacts 50, 64, 79 specific characters 173 text 121, 173 location information 212

Lock & Turn Off option 210 lock codes 207

Lock Device dialog box 209

Lock icon 116, 139, 178, 183

Lock SIM check box 208 locking keyboard 47, 206 phone 207–208 screen 207

Treo smartphone 208,

209 logging in to corporate servers 214 logic functions 175 looking up contacts 68

Lookup button 68 loops 222 losing information 195, 209, 223 passwords 209, 211

Lost Password option 211 low coverage areas 233 lowercase letters 38

M

M4V files 138

Mac systems installing applications from

177 installing synchronization software on 27 installing to expansion cards and 178 removing applications and

179 requirements for 23 sending email and 87, 97 synchronizing with 29,

186, 191, 228, 229 transferring music from

144, 145, 146 uninstalling desktop software and 229 upgrading and 25 user folders on 220 magnet 14 mail.

See

email

Mail Service pick list 89, 90

Manage Playlists command

147, 148 map (World Clock) 159 marking information as private 64, 210–211

Mask Records option 210 masks 206, 210 mathematical functions 175 maximizing battery life 19,

213

Media application 142 media features 20

Media Player 143, 145, 146 memory 123, 155, 242 freeing 178, 242 memory dial 257 memory slots (calculator)

175 memos

See also

Memos application; notes creating 169 deleting 169 recording 169 sending voice 104 truncated text in 233

I N D E X 283

284 I N D E X

Memos application changing fonts for 200 entering text in 169 opening 42, 169 overview 165 removing memos from

169 synchronizing information in 29

Memos button 169 menu items 35

Menu key 13, 36, 37 menu shortcuts 36 menus 35

Message command 53 message icons 111 message lists 107

Message Tone pick list 111

Message validity period pick list 109 messages

See also

email; multimedia messages; text messages adding graphical elements to 103 adding multiple recipients for 69 arranging in folders 107 chat sessions and 108 checking status of 84 checking voicemail 83 creating 101, 103, 104 defining favorite buttons for 69 deleting 107, 109 displaying status of 111 displaying unread 84, 151,

156 including in alerts 109 invalid characters in 102 memory consumption and

243 paging from 101 previewing 104 retrieving voicemail 55, 83 saving 102 selecting phone numbers in 52 setting colors for 109 setting preferences for

108–111 specifying priority settings for 104 storing 111 troubleshooting 237, 238

Messages page

(Preferences) 108 messaging 85, 237–238

See also

text messages

Messaging application

See also

multimedia messages; text messages changing fonts for 200 creating chat sessions from 108 creating multimedia messages with 103 creating text messages with 101 customizing 108 deleting messages in 107 opening 42 overview 101 sorting messages in 107 status indicators for 111 viewing contacts from 63 viewing multimedia messages in 106 messaging applications 205

Messaging button 13, 41, 42

Messaging Inbox 34 messaging preferences 108–

111 messaging services 7, 101 metric values 175

microphone 14, 57, 136

Microphone pick list 136

Microsoft Excel 85, 93, 167

Microsoft Exchange

ActiveSync 100

Microsoft Exchange Servers

100, 151

Microsoft Office Manager

See

Documents application

Microsoft Outlook.

See

Outlook

Microsoft Windows.

See

Windows systems

Microsoft Word documents

85, 93, 167 minutes usage information

(phone) 62 mirror 14 mismatched language setups 221

MMS messaging services

101, 238, 250 mobile networks 234 mobile phones.

See

wireless phones modems 124

Modify FDN command 208 monitoring phone status 82

Month View 151, 157

Move to command 140 moving around on screen 31,

33 moving through web pages

116, 123

MP3 files 144

MP3 formats 142

MP4 files 138

MPEG-4 formats 142

MPG files 138 multi-connector pin 14 multimedia files 103, 137,

138, 243 multimedia message icons

111 multimedia messages

See also

Messaging application addressing 103 attaching photos to 134,

139 attaching videos to 136,

139 attaching voice memos to

170 checking status of 84 creating 103 deleting 107 dialing from 52 displaying details of 106 downloading 110 memory consumption and

243 playing 106 previewing 104 requirements for 9 restrictions for 58 retrieving 84, 104 selecting alert tones for

110 selecting text in 106 sending 101, 104 setting delivery confirmation for 109 troubleshooting 237, 238 viewing 106 multimedia messaging services 7, 101, 238

Multimedia Messaging

System (MMS) 250

MultiMediaCard cards 191 music adjusting volume 147 answering phone calls and

53 changing playlists for 148

I N D E X 285

286 I N D E X converting to MP3 formats

143, 144, 145 creating playlists for 147,

148 downloading 120 hands-free devices and 71 listening to 71, 142, 146 memory consumption and

243 pausing 147 playing 120, 146, 147 selecting 147 stopping 147 uploading 144 music files 120, 142, 144,

243 music player.

See

Pocket

Tunes music subscription services

143

Music_Audio folder 145 mute button 57

My Treo icon 247

N

names email providers and 87 sorting on 107 synchronizing and 226,

249 naming categories 203 device 25, 226 email accounts 89 expansion cards 195 photo albums 133 photo groups 136 playlists 147 video albums 135 voice memos 169, 170 navigator buttons 13, 33

See also

5-way navigator

Network Configuration options 110 network connection icon 126

Network Preferences page

110 networks 81, 234, 238

New Bookmark dialog box

117

New button 35

New Contact command 63

New Favorite command 68

New Favorites dialog box 68,

69

New Message dialog box 91,

92

Next Song button 146

No Service message 21, 82

No Service—SOS Only message 82

Normal mode (browser) 117,

123

Note button 64 notes adding 64, 155, 161 storing 168 notifications 55, 83, 98

See also

alerts number formats 201 numbers calculator display options for 175 entering 38, 174

O

offline synchronization 231 offline viewing (web) 118

OK button 35 online forums 247 online support (Palm) 247 opening

Alert dialog box 173 application menus 35 applications 13, 41, 42,

58, 193

Applications View 41

Bookmarks View 118

Call Log 53

Dial Pad 49, 57 email applications 240 email attachments 167 files 167, 168

History list 121

HotSync manager 185 on-device documentation

247

Pocket Tunes 146

Quick Tour 247 web browser 42, 116 web pages 105, 123, 240

World Clock 159 operating system

(smartphone) 24, 251 operating systems (PCs) 23,

221 operational warnings 255

Optimized Mode (browser)

115, 116

Option key 37, 38, 42, 250

Option key indicator 38

Option Lock indicator 39

Option Lock mode 39, 102 options in pick lists 36

Organize Favorites command

68, 70 organizer features 20, 48

Outbox 111

Outbox button 91 outgoing messages 111

Outlook caller IDs and 65 duplicate entries in 231 entering appointments and 152 incorrect time zones and

232 synchronizing with 22, 27,

29, 231 time zones and 152

Outlook folders 231 overdue tasks 151, 156, 162 owner information 212

Owner Preferences screen

212

P

page icon 111

Page View 118, 121, 122 paging 101 paired relationships.

See

partnerships pairing.

See

partnerships

Palm (online support) 247

Palm Desktop software caller IDs and 65 defined 250 device names in 249 incorrect time zones and

232 installing 24, 177, 221 multiple appointments and

152 password-protecting 211 reinstalling 231 synchronizing with 22, 24,

29, 227 time zones and 152 troubleshooting 221, 227 uninstalling 229 viewing and editing media from 142

PALM folder 133, 134

Palm OS software 24, 176,

251

Palm OS-compatible applications 176

Palm Quick Install.

See

Quick

Install

Palm Software Installation

CD 8, 26, 221 paper clip icon 92, 95

I N D E X 287

288 I N D E X partial battery icon 19 partnerships 73, 124, 251 passkeys 72, 73, 125, 128

Password box 209, 211 password hints 209 passwords call barring and 78 changing 210, 211 deleting 210 dialing 57, 69 email and 90, 91 forgetting 209, 211 owner preferences and

212 private entries and 206,

210 requiring 208 unlocking smartphone and

209 voicemail and 55

Paste command 49, 121 pasting phone numbers 49 text 121

Pause button 147 pausing music 147 streamed content 121 video playback 136, 138 video recording 136 voice memos 170

PCS phones.

See

wireless phones

PCs.

See

personal computers

PDB files 176

PDF files 93, 167 pending alerts 105, 226 pending messages 108, 111 personal computers connecting smartphone to

22, 27 creating partnerships for

124 downloading applications to 177 installing applications from

177, 221 installing synchronization software on 26 quarantined files on 24,

26, 219 setting up DUN connections for 125 synchronizing with 23, 29 transferring information to

29 transferring multimedia to

142 transferring music from

144, 145–146 personal identification numbers (PINs) 251 personal information 149,

205, 208, 212

See also

information personal information managers 221, 251 personal schedules 151 personalizing smartphone

157, 197

See also

preferences phone

See also

phone calls answering 53 conference calls and 60 dialing 49–53, 68, 121 documentation conventions for 47 getting started with 21 hands-free devices and

70, 74, 75 hanging up 57, 59, 61 locking 207–208 overview 56–57 restrictions for 57

selecting alert tones for 77 selecting ringtones for 76–

77 setting preferences for 61,

62, 80 silencing ringer for 54, 199 troubleshooting 233–235 turning on and off 48 viewing Call Log for 53 viewing minutes usage for

62 viewing status of 82

Phone application accessing Dial Pad in 57 adding caller IDs 64, 65 contact information and

50, 63, 64 creating speed-dial buttons from 68 customizing 79–80 defined 251 displaying events in 157 opening 42, 48 overview 45 selecting wallpaper for 79,

141 selecting wireless networks from 81 setting alert tones from 77 setting dialing preferences in 80 status icons for 82–84 using TTY 81

Phone button 13, 41, 42

Phone Call screen 54 phone calls

See also

phone; phone numbers adding a second 59 adjusting volume for 21,

78 answering multiple 60 automatically answering

75 barring 78 disabling screen for 207 forwarding 61–62 keyboard backlight and 38 listening to music and 53 making 49–53, 57, 59 placing on hold 56, 59 receiving 53, 60 restricting 208 running applications and

57 sending to voicemail 54 switching between active

60 text messages and 105 viewing details about 56

Phone Display Options command 79 phone icons 82 phone indicator.

See

indicator light

Phone Info command 22

Phone Info screen 22

Phone Lock 207

Phone Lock command 208

Phone Lock settings 208 phone numbers adding 58 assigning prefixes to 80 assigning to Quick Keys

68 clearing 49 copying 49, 121 creating speed-dial buttons for 68–69 dialing extra digits with 57,

69 entering 49–52, 62, 66, 79 getting device 22 highlighting 34 importing 161 pasting into Dial Pad 49 redialing most recent 52

I N D E X 289

290 I N D E X saving 59 selecting 52

Phone Off message 48, 82 photo albums 133, 137, 140

Photo Settings screen 136 photos

See also

pictures adding as wallpaper 141 adding caller ID 64, 65 adding captions to 134 adding to albums 140 adding to contacts 141 attaching to multimedia messages 103 backing up 142 copying 139 deleting 134, 142 displaying information about 141 downloading 120 grouping 138 personalizing 134 removing from albums

140, 141 repositioning 137 rotating 141 saving 106, 134, 136 selecting as backgrounds

156 sending 92, 134, 139 setting default size 136 setting preferences for

136 storing 131, 133 viewing 136, 137, 142 pick lists 34, 36

Pics&Videos icon 137 picture formats 137

Picture list 139 pictures

See also

images; photos adding to contacts 65 previewing 136 saving 106, 134, 136 setting preferences for

136–137 taking 133, 133–134, 242

Pictures & Videos application copying pictures and videos in 140 creating wallpaper with

141 hiding toolbar in 139 opening 137 organizing media with 140 removing photos or videos from 141 rotating photos in 141 sending pictures or videos from 139 synchronizing information in 29 viewing pictures in 137 viewing slide shows in

138 viewing videos in 138

PIMs 221, 251

PIN unlock key 251

PINs 207, 251 plain text formats 94

Play button 146

Play icon (browser) 120 playback pausing 121, 136, 138,

147 resuming 121, 147 stopping 106, 147, 170 playing multimedia messages 106 music 120, 146, 147 streamed content 120 video clips 135, 138 voice captions 138 voice memos 170 playlists 147–148

Playlists command 148 plug-ins 239

Pocket Tunes application changing playlists in 148 compatible formats for

143 creating playlists in 147 opening 145 overview 142 playing music from 146,

147 upgrading 143

Pocket Tunes icons 146

POP protocols 99 portable radio.

See

radio

Power Preferences screen

20, 213

Power/End button 13, 47, 48

PowerPoint files 93, 167

PPT files 167

PRC files 176 precautions 258 predefined passkeys 73,

129, 130 preferences alarm tones 157 alert tones 77 applications 204, 205 buttons 204 calculator 175 camcorder 136 camera 136 contact information 66 country-specific 201 dialing 80 email 97, 98–100 events 153 hands-free devices 75

Keyguard 206 messaging 108–111 owner information 212 phone 61, 62, 80 power settings 214 ringtones 76, 77 system colors 202 system date and time 153,

212 system sounds 199 tasks 163 web browser 118 web pages 122–124 prefixes (phone numbers) 80

Prefs button 212 preinstalled applications 176,

178, 247

See also

applications; specific application preset delays 209 preset passkeys 73, 129,

130 pressing keyboard keys 38 pressing onscreen buttons

207 previewing messages 104

Previous Song button 146 primary applications 42, 204 primary button assignments

204 prioritizing tasks 161, 163 priority levels 161, 163 priority settings 104 privacy flag 161

Privacy Mode check box 109

Private check box 210 private entries 206, 210–211 caution for 211 programs.

See

applications; software progress indicator bar (video recording) 136

Prompt sound pick list 136 protecting personal information 205, 208 protecting the screen 13 protecting Treo smartphone

205–212

Protocol pick list 90 proxy servers 124 pTunes icon 145

I N D E X 291

292 I N D E X

PUK (PIN unlock key) 251 punctuation marks 38, 40

Purge command 107, 155,

163

Purge pick list 107 purging old information 25

Q

quarantined files 24, 26, 219 quick buttons 41, 42, 204

Quick Install 178, 251

Quick Keys 68, 69, 251

Quick Tour 247

Quick Tour icon 247

QuickText button 102

QuickText phrases 102

R

radians 175 radio 255 radio frequency emissions

253, 256 random number generator

175 range (Bluetooth devices) 72

Rcl button (calculator) 175 readjusting the screen 202 receipts (messaging) 109 recently viewed web page icon 117 rechargeable battery 8

See also

battery

Record command 183

Record Completion Date check box 163

Record new option 104 recorder 169 recording ringtones 77 sounds 158 videos 103, 134–135 voice memos 169

Records button 180 recovering information 226 recovering lost passwords

211 recurring events.

See

repeating events red paper clip icon 92

Redial list 52 redirector (websites) 239 reducing storage space 24

Refresh command 239 refresh icon (browser) 117 refreshing web pages 117,

239 reinstalling Palm Desktop software 231 reinstalling third-party applications 220, 223

Remember Last Category option 66

Reminder Sound pick list 158 reminders.

See

alarms; alerts

Remove from album command 140 removing albums 140, 141 alerts 174 applications 25, 178, 179,

243 attachments 92 bookmarks 118 contacts 66 cookies 123 device names 25 email 96, 243 events 155 expansion cards 193 favorite buttons 70 files 243 memos 169 messages 107, 109 music from playlists 148 passwords 210

photos 134, 140, 142 playlists 148 tasks 163 video clips 135, 140, 142

Rename Card command 195

Rename Memo command

170 repeat intervals (events) 154

Repeat pick list 154, 158,

161 repeating alarms 158 repeating event icon 154 repeating events 154, 157 repeating tasks 161 replacing smartphone battery

20, 223–225

Request Receipts pick list

109 rescheduling events 155

Reset Counters button 63 resets 219, 221–223, 235,

245 caution for 209, 222 resizing text 116

Resolution pick list 136 resolution settings

(camcorder) 135 resolution settings (camera)

133 restarting Treo smartphone.

See

resets restoring factory defaults 204 resuming playback 121, 147

Return key 37

Review photos/videos pick list 136

RF emissions 253, 256

RF Safety Statement 253

Right button (navigator) 34,

35, 36 ringer adjusting volume 78 silencing 54 turning off 199

Ringer switch 15, 48, 199 ringtone file types 103, 120

Ringtone pick list 65 ringtone preferences 76, 77 ringtones assigning to caller IDs 65 downloading 76, 120 recording 77 sending with messages

93, 103, 104 setting for phone 76–77 roaming 110

Rotate command 141 rotating photos 141

S

Safety Statement (FCC) 253

Save As command 168

Save as Contact command

141

Save as Wallpaper command

141

Save List button 148

Save Page command 118

Save Picture command 106

Save Sound command 106 saved web page indicator

118 saving calendars 106 contact information 106 files 168 images 120 messages 102 phone numbers 59 pictures 106, 134, 136 playlists 148 video clips 135, 136 voice memos 169 web pages 118 schedules 151 scheduling events 152, 153,

154

Sci(x) display format 175

I N D E X 293

294 I N D E X scientific calculator 174 scientific notation 175 screen accessing command buttons on 35 activating items on 34 activating wrong features

225 adjusting brightness 56,

200, 214 aligning 202 battery life and 20 dimming 42 disabling 206, 207 highlighting items on 34 locking 207 moving around on 31, 33 protecting 13 selecting items on 34, 36 troubleshooting 225–226,

235 turning on or off 47, 214,

235, 249 waking up 47 screen fonts 200 screen protectors 226 scroll arrows 34, 94 scrolling 116 scrolling preferences 123

SD cards 191

SDIO cards 192 search results 173 searching for contacts 51, 64, 79 specific characters 173 text 121, 173 wireless services 81 secondary applications 42,

204 secure websites 115, 116,

241 security 73, 205, 210, 211

Security button 209, 210 security certificates 115

Security command 211

Security screen 209 security software 205

Select Business Card command 66

Select Font dialog box 201

Select Media screen 92

Select Network command 81 selecting alarm tones 157 applications 42, 43 chat sessions 107, 108 dates 151 favorite buttons 51 home city 159 items in pick lists 36 items on screen 34 menu items 35 music 147 phone numbers 52 photo albums 137, 139 playlists 148 text 35, 106, 123 video albums 138, 139 wallpaper 79, 141 web links 116 wireless networks 81 self-portrait mirror 14

Send button 13, 52, 91

Send command 181

Send From pick list 181

Send To Handheld droplet

145 sending applications over

Bluetooth 181 calls to voicemail 54 email 92, 105, 115 information over Bluetooth

180 photos 92, 134, 139 text messages 53, 54,

101

to chat rooms 108 video clips 136, 139 voice memos 170

Sent folder 111 servers 29, 214 service contracts 7 setting alarm clocks 160 passwords 55, 209, 210 settings (incompatible) 219

Setup Devices button 188

Setup Devices dialog box 73,

124, 128, 188

Shift/Find indicator 38

Shift/Find key 38, 173

Short Messaging Service

(SMS) 252 shortcuts 36, 43

Show Address Bar check box

122

Show Calendar event check box 79, 157

Show Categories check box

163

Show Category Column check box 156

Show Category List check box 156, 157

Show Completed Items check box 163

Show Due Dates check box

161, 163

Show Due Tasks check box

156

Show Messages check box

156

Show Priorities check box

163

Show Records option 210,

211

Show SIM Phonebook check box 66, 67

Show Time Bars check box

156

Show timestamps in chats check box 109

Shutter sound pick list 136

Side button

13, 146, 169,

204 signal strength 82, 233

Signal Strength icon 48 signatures 100 silencing system sounds 54,

199 silencing the ringer 54 silent alarm 76, 77, 158, 199 silent alerts 110

SIM card 15, 207, 252

SIM Phonebook 64, 66, 67

SIT files 176, 177

Size button 24, 180 slide shows 138 slides 103, 252

Slideshow Setting command

139 smartcard 252 smartphone adding additional security for 211 additional information for

247 battery life for 19 caution for electrostatic discharge and 258 charging 17, 18, 20 compatible headsets for

70 components of 8 connecting to PCs 22, 27 customizing 157, 197 defined 47 disposing of 256 entering passkeys for 73 features described 13–14 freeing disk space on 178,

242

I N D E X 295

296 I N D E X getting free disk space 24 getting help with 217, 247 locking 208, 209 naming 25, 226 navigating around on 31 not responding 221 overview 7 phone number for 22 precautions for 16, 19 preset buttons on 68 protecting 205–212 required items for 9 resetting 209, 221–223 setting owner preferences for 212 storing 13, 14 synchronization defaults for 29 third-party applications and

243 transferring data to 23, 29 transferring files to 23, 24 troubleshooting 217, 247 turning on and off 17, 47,

255 unauthorized users and

205 unsupported connections for 127 usage guidelines for 253,

256 viewing signal strength for

82

SMS messaging services

252 soft resets 185, 221 software

See also

applications; synchronization software accessing from web browser 120 conflicts with 229 included with smartphone

8 installing 30, 176 reinstalling 231 troubleshooting 221 uninstalling 229 updating 219

Software Installation CD 8,

26, 221 songlists.

See

playlists songs.

See

music

Sort by check box 163

Sort by Date command 107

Sort by Name command 107

Sort command 107 sorting messages 95, 107 tasks 163

Sound & Alerts Preferences screen 157, 199 sound clips 103, 104

Sound Off position (ringer)

54, 199

Sound On position (ringer)

199 sound preferences 157 sounds 103, 158, 199

Sounds button 199

Space key 37 speaker 14 speakerphone 20, 56, 234,

255

Speakerphone button 56 special characters 38, 40,

102 specifications 261 speed-dial buttons 51, 68–69 speed-dial indicator 51 spreadsheets 85, 93, 167

Start With pick list 118 static 234, 236 static electricity 258 statistical functions 175 statistical information 179

status icons (email) 95 status icons (phone) 82–84 stereo adapters 71, 142 stereo headsets 71, 142

Sto button (calculator) 175 stopping multimedia playback 106 music playback 147 video recording 135 voice memo playback 170 storage solutions 171 storage space.

See

disk space storing images 243 information 24, 171, 191,

242 messages 111 music files 145 notes 168 photos 131, 133 smartphone 13, 14 videos 131, 134 streaming content 120, 252 style sheets 117, 123 stylus 14, 33, 36 submitting web forms 116 support (Palm) 247 support (wireless service provider) 247

Swap button 59 symbols 38, 40, 63, 102 sync.

See

synchronization; synchronizing

Sync automatically check box

97 sync button 28, 30, 145 sync cable 27, 30 synchronization

ActiveSync and 100

Bluetooth devices and

187, 189 caution for 24 changing defaults for 185,

186, 187, 196 device names and 25 overview 171 preparing for 23 recommendations for 29 removing applications and

179 selecting applications for

185–187 setting default application for 204 setting up connections for

22 third-party applications and

221, 223, 226 transferring music files and 144 troubleshooting 226–233 wireless connections and

127 synchronization software

26–27, 230

Synchronize the files setting

230 synchronizing applications 29, 185

Calendar events 151 dates and time 212 information 23, 26, 29,

185 offline 231 over infrared connections

190–191 photos and videos 142 time zones 212 with Outlook 22, 27, 29,

231 system colors 202 system dates and time 159,

212 system errors 229, 235, 245

I N D E X 297

298 I N D E X system requirements personal computers 23 system resets 219, 222,

235, 245 system sounds 54, 199–200

System Volume pick list 200

T

tabs 49, 58, 79

Take new picture option 103

Take new video option 103 taking pictures 133, 133–

134, 242

Tap and Drag check box 123 tapping 33, 34, 36, 202

Task Details dialog box 160,

161 tasks

See also

events; Tasks application adding 160 assigning to attachments

95 checking off 161 deleting 163 displaying 151, 156, 162,

163 marking as private 161 prioritizing 161, 163 setting alarms for 161,

163 setting preferences for

163 viewing due dates for 162,

163

Tasks application changing fonts for 200 opening 160 synchronizing information in 29

Tasks button 160

Tasks list 151, 161, 162, 163

Tasks Preferences screen

163 technical support (Palm) 247 technical support (wireless service provider) 247 telephone calls.

See

phone; phone calls temperature conversions

175 text copying 121 entering 38, 169 finding 121, 173 highlighting 34, 35, 121 resizing 116 selecting 35, 106, 123 truncated 233 viewing against photos

156 text fields 36 text message icon 111 text messages

See also

messages addressing 101 checking status of 83, 84 containing links 105 creating 101–104 deleting 107 dialing from 52 receiving 110 requirements for 9 retrieving 84, 104 selecting alert tones for

110 sending 53, 54, 101, 107 setting priority of 104 special characters and 102 troubleshooting 237 text messaging services 7,

237 third-party applications

5-way navigator and 33 adding security and 211 backing up information and 24, 223

beaming and 185 caller IDs and 65 caution for 204, 219 compatibility with 24, 26 deleting 25, 243 getting help with 178 hard resets and 222 installing 219, 242 manually deleting 179 reinstalling 220, 223 searching in 173 transferring to expansion cards 25 troubleshooting 33, 243–

244 uninstalling 178, 222

VPN clients and 215 third-party software.

See

third-party applications

Thumbnail View 138, 139,

142

TIF files 137 time displaying video recording

134 scheduling events and

152, 155 setting 212 synchronizing 212 viewing 158 time bars 156 time formats 201 time preferences 212 time slots (calendar) 156

Time Zone pick list 152 time zones 153, 212, 232

Timed Events check box 157 timestamps 109 tips 247

Tips command 247

Tips icon 247 to do items.

See

tasks toolbars 121, 139

Totals command 62 touchscreen.

See

screen

Touchscreen Preferences screen 202 transactions 116, 241 transmission delays 237, 238

Trash folder 96 travel alarm 160

Treo smartphone.

See

smartphone trigonometric functions 175 troubleshooting 217, 247 truncated text 233 trusted devices 127

See also

partnerships

Trusted Devices button 124,

128

Trusted Devices list 125,

127, 129, 181 trusted pairs.

See

partnerships

TTY/TDD machine 81 turning on or off

Bluetooth devices 74, 181

Caps Lock 38 keyboard backlight 38

Keyguard 47, 206 microphone 136 phone 48 screen 47, 214, 235 smartphone 17, 47, 255 speakerphone 56 touch-sensitive features

207

Typing starts contacts search option 79

U

unauthorized users 205

Unfiled category 182 uninstalling

Palm desktop software

229

I N D E X 299

300 I N D E X third-party applications

178, 222

Unknown Caller pick list 76 unlocking the keyboard 206

Treo smartphone 208,

209 unread messages 84, 111,

151, 156 unsafe areas 255 untimed event icon 154 untimed events 153, 154,

157

Untimed Events check box

157

Up button (navigator) 34, 35,

36 updating application software 219 information 23, 29, 171 system date and time 159

World Clock 159 upgrades 23–26, 68, 229 troubleshooting 219–220 uploading music files 144 uppercase letters 38 urgent messages 111

URLs

See also

web links beaming 183 entering 116, 122 in text messages 105

USB hub 28, 228

USB ports 28

Use color for pick list 109 user discussion groups 247 user folders 220, 227, 252

User Guide

247 usernames 90, 91

V

Verizon Wireless preset buttons and 68

VersaMail application accessing email and 87 adding attachments from

92–93 creating email messages from 91 customizing 97–100 displaying attachments with 94 documentation for 243

Exchange ActiveSync accounts and 100 getting started with 87 opening 42, 89 overview 87 responding to messages from 94 setting up accounts with

89, 90 sorting messages with 95 switching accounts from

96 troubleshooting 237

Version button 180 version numbers 180

VGA digital camera.

See

camera

Vibrate pick list 76, 77, 158 vibrating alarm 76, 77, 158,

199 video albums 135, 137, 140 video file types 103, 120,

138 video recording screen 134

Video Settings screen 136 videos adding to albums 140 adjusting volume for 136 attaching to email 92, 136 attaching to multimedia messages 103 backing up 142 copying 139 deleting 135, 142

displaying information about 141 downloading 120 grouping 138 jumping to specific sections of 136 pausing 136, 138 playing 120, 135, 138 recording 103, 134–135 removing from albums

140, 141 saving 135, 136 sending 136, 139 setting default size 136 setting preferences for

136 storing 131, 134 viewing 136, 138, 142

View By pick list 204 viewing alerts 173 alternate characters 40 application information

179–180 application menus 35 applications 203 attachments 94 available disk space 24 bookmarks 118 connection status 82, 116,

126, 237, 238 contact information 51, 64 current date and time 158 due dates 162, 163 email messages 93, 94 error messages 245 event categories 156 events 79, 151, 156, 157 favorite buttons 51 items in pick lists 36 multimedia messages 106 overdue tasks 151 personal calendar 151 photos 136, 137, 142 private entries 211

Quick Tour documentation

247 signal strength 82 slide shows 138 tasks 156, 162, 163 unread messages 84,

151, 156 video clips 136, 138, 142 video recording time 134 voicemail messages 83 web addresses 122 web pages 115, 117 virtual private networks

(VPNs) 214

Visibility pick list 129, 181 voice captions adding 134, 141 background music and

139 playing 138

Voice Memo application 165,

169–170

Voice Memo list 170 voice memos 104, 169, 170 voicemail checking 83 listening to 55 retrieving messages 55,

83 sending calls to 54 setting alert tones for 78 setting up 54

Voicemail Alert pick list 78

Voicemail icon 55, 83 voicemail notifications 55, 83 voicemail page icon 111 volume alarm tones 157 alert tones 77 music 147 phone 21, 78, 234

I N D E X 301

302 I N D E X ringer 78 ringtones 76 video clips 136 voice memos 170

Volume button 13, 21, 78 volume conversions

(calculator) 175

Volume pick list 76, 77 volume preferences 199

VPN client software 215

W

waking up screen 47 wallpaper 79, 141 warnings 255 warranty 224 web addresses 117, 121,

122

See also

URLs; web links web browser accessing email providers and 87 auto-completion options for 122 beaming from 183 bookmarking and 117,

119 customizing 122–124 deleting cookies for 123 dialing phone numbers and 121 hiding toolbar in 121 opening 42, 116 overview 113, 115 restrictions for 115 selecting default views for

118 selecting home page for

122 streaming and 120 unsupported elements for

239 viewing connection status for 116 web browser application.

See

Blazer web browser; web browser web browser buttons 117 web browsing

See also

web browser dial-up networking and

124, 126 from smartphone 115,

124 memory consumption and

243 requirements for 9 restrictions for 57 secure sites and 115, 116,

241 selecting default application for 205 troubleshooting 238–241 web browsing service 7 web forms 116

Web icon 116 web links assigning to favorite buttons 69 creating email from 115 highlighting 34

Palm online support 247 selecting 116 web pages accessing 115, 117, 239 bookmarking 117–119 caching 123, 243 changing fonts for 200 changing layouts for 116 copying text from 121 disabling images for 117,

123 displaying 115, 117 finding text on 121 loading 123, 240 opening from text messages 105

opening History list for

121 optimizing 240 refreshing 117, 239 resizing text on 116 saving 118 scrolling 116, 123 selecting most recent 118 selecting phone numbers on 52 selecting text on 121, 123 sending email from 115 setting initial view for 122 setting preferences for

122–124 viewing offline 118 web-based email 87 websites

See also

web browsing accessing 115, 117, 124 accessing Palm online support 247 browsing to secure 116 displaying recently visited

117 downloading files from

119, 137 installing applications from

176 redirectors and 239 submitting transactions and 116, 241

Week View 151 weight conversions 175

Wide Page Mode (browser)

116

Windows systems installing applications from

177 installing to expansion cards and 178 removing applications and

179 requirements for 23 sending email and 87, 97 synchronization defaults for 29 synchronizing with 185,

190, 227, 229 transferring music from

143, 145, 146 viewing multimedia on

142 wireless accounts.

See

accounts; wireless service provider wireless connections 113,

127, 180, 181

See also

connections wireless devices.

See

Bluetooth devices hands-free devices; smartphone wireless features 20, 244 wireless modems 124 wireless networks 81 wireless phones 257, 258 wireless service provider onscreen message 82 phone services and 60, 61 smartphone requirements for 7 technical support for 247 text messaging and 7 troubleshooting connections to 240 troubleshooting Internet connections and 239 voicemail and 54 voicemail services and 54 wizards 176

WMA formats 143

Word documents 85, 93,

167 word searches 173 words, selecting 35

World Clock 158–160

I N D E X 303

304 I N D E X

World Clock icon 159 world map 159

Wrap Search check box 121

X

XLS files 167

Y

Year View 151

Z

ZIP files 176, 177 zoom settings (camera) 133

Palm, Inc.

950 W. Maude Ave.

Sunnyvale, CA 94085-2801

United States of America PN: 185-10425-01